Tải bản đầy đủ (.doc) (229 trang)

giaoan8fullkhong hay dau

Bạn đang xem bản rút gọn của tài liệu. Xem và tải ngay bản đầy đủ của tài liệu tại đây (1.1 MB, 229 trang )

<span class='text_page_counter'>(1)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=1>

Week 01 Date of planning 20/8/010


Period 01 Date of teaching 24/8/010


<b>Language review</b>
<b>A.The aims and requests.</b>


<b>1. Objectives </b>


- Present simple, present progressive, future simple , past simple tenses.
- Adjectives/Adverbs.


- Modal verbs ...
<b>2.Teaching points</b>


- Ss' knowledge


- Ss get on with sections and skills of English 8.
<b>3. Preparation</b>


<i>+ Teacher</i>: Text book, work book,...


<i>+ Students</i>: Text book, work book, school things, ....


<b>B. Procedures</b>
<b>1. Organization: (1)</b>


+Good morning!How are you today?Who’s absent today?
<b>2. Checking up/Warm up: </b>


<b>3. New lesson: (25)</b>



T’ activities T Ss’ activities


- Ask Ss to repeat some forms and uses
of tenses that they have learnt.


+ Present simple tense.


<i>(+) S + V-s(es) ....</i>


<i>(?) Do/does + S + V-infi ... ?</i>
<i>(-) S + do/does + not + V-infi ...</i>


+ Present progressive tense


<i>(+) S + is/am/are + V-ing ....</i>
<i>(?) Is/are/am + S + V-ing ... ?</i>
<i>(-) S + is/am/are + not + V-ing</i>


+ Past simple tense.


<i>(+) S + V-ed ....</i>


<i>(?) Did + S + V-infi ... ?</i>
<i>(-) S + did + not + V</i>


+ Future simple tense


<i>(+) S +will/shall + V-infi ....</i>
<i>(?) Will/shall + S + V-infi ... ?</i>


<i>(-) S +won't/shan't + V-infi</i>


- Devide the class into 4 groups.


- Ask the class to repeat forms of
10


- Retell


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(2)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=2>

comparatives, superlatives, adverbs of
frequency ...


<b>Adjectives / Adverbs.</b>


- Comparatives and superlatives
- Adverbs of frequency


- Adjective to Adverb .
<b>Modal verbs.</b>


(must / have to / ...) ...


- Introduce the sections and topics of
English 8.


<b>Sections of English 8.</b>
(1)- Getting started.
(2)- Listen and read
(3)- Speak



(4)- Listen
(5)- Read
(6)- Write


(7)- Language focus.
<b>Topics of English 8.</b>
- You and Me


- Education
- Community
- Health
- Recreation


- The World Around Us


10


7


5


-Group 2 makkes examples, use
the present progressive tense.
-Group 3 makkes examples, use
the past simple tense.


-Group 4 makkes examples, use
the future simple tense.


<b> - Repeat the forms</b>



- Look at book and listen to the
T.


<b>4. Consolidation: (15 )</b>


<b>Question 1: Complete the sentences using the correct present simple ar past</b>
<b>simple tense of the verbs given.</b>


1. Last week, all of the class (have)... a cold.
2. She (learn)... how to cook last month.
3. Hoa (wash)... her clothes every day.


4. Mai (make) ...a new shirt for her mother yesterday.
<b>Key: </b><i>1. had ; 2. learned ; 3. washes ; 4. made</i>


<b>Question 2: Change adjectives to adverbs.</b>


0. beautiful - beautifully.


1- Slow ... 4- Fast ...
2- Heavy... 5- Good ...
3- Strong... 6- Successful ...
<b>Key: </b><i>Slowly, heavily, strongly, fastly, well, successfully</i>.


<b>5. Homework: (3 )</b>


- Prepare the next lesson.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(3)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=3>

Week 01 <sub>Date of planning</sub> <sub>21/8/010</sub>



Period 02 <sub>Date of teaching</sub> <sub>25/8/010</sub>


Unit 1: My friends



getting started - listen and read
<b>A.The aims and requests.</b>


<b>1. Objectives. </b>


By the end of the lesson Ss can describe a friend or groups of friends and their
favorite activities.


<b>2.Teaching points. </b>


<i>+ What do/does + S + look like ?</i>


<i>+ To be (not) adj + enough + to do ST</i>.


- Ss train communicatve skill.
<b>3. Preparation</b>


<b>+</b><i> Teacher:</i> Text book, work book, tape and cassette player...


<b>+</b><i>Students:</i> Text book, work book, school things, ....
<b>B. Procedures.</b>


<b>1. Organization: (1)</b>


+Good morning!How are you today?Who’s absent today?


<b>2. Checking up/Warm up: (5-7’)</b>


T’ activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1. Checking up</b>


- One student talks what he/she did during the
summer vacation (in front of the class).


<b>3. New lesson: (33)</b>


T’ activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1. Getting started</b>


- Let Ss talk about their last summer
holiday.


- Ask Ss to look at the picture P-10 and
then making suggested questions.


<i>+ How many people are there in each</i>
<i>picture ?</i>


13


- Practice in pairs:


S1: <i>What did you do during the</i>
<i>summer vacation ?</i>



S2: <i>I went to ....</i>


S1: <i>What did you remember most</i>


<i>?</i>


S2: ....


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(4)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=4>

<i>+ Where are they ?</i>
<i>+ What are they doing ?</i>


<i>+ Do you enjoy such activities ?</i>


<i>+ What are your favorite after school</i>
<i>activities ?</i>


<i>+ Do you play soccer/tennis .... in your</i>
<i>free time ?</i>


<i>+ Who do you like to play with ? (boys or</i>
<i>girls ?</i>)


<b>Answer</b>


-play chess
Soccer
Volleyball
-Reading



<b>2. Listen and read</b>
- Make questions


<i>+ Do you remember Hoa ? Where does</i>
<i>she come from ?</i>


<i>+ Who does she live with ?</i>


<i>+ Which grade is she in</i> ?


- Introduces (<i>Hoa come from Hue, she is</i>
<i>talking to Lan about one of her friends in</i>
<i>Hue. You listen to the tape and answer</i>


<i>what does hoa talk about her friend ?</i>)


- Play the tape (P.10) twice
-enough


-receive


- Play the tape again (twice)


<b>1.1.Practice the dialogue with a partner</b>


- Call on some pairs to practice in front of
the class.


- Corrects Ss' answers if it 's
necessary



<b>2.2 Answer the following question</b>
<b>Answer key: </b>


20


-Copy the answer


- Look <i><b>"</b><b>Listen and read</b>"</i> and
answer


- Ss' answers may be:


<i>+ Yes, I do. She comes from Hue</i>
<i>+ She lives with her uncle</i>


<i>+ She is in grade 7</i>


- Listen to the T and prepare to
listen.


- Listen to the tape and repeat
some model sentences in the
dialogue:


-Work in pairs


<i>+ What do/does + S + look</i>
<i>like ?</i>



<i>+ What a (lovely smile) !</i>


<i>+ To be (not) adj + enough + to</i>
<i>do ST. (đủ/khơng đủ để làm việc</i>
<i>gì đó)</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(5)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=5>

<i>a) Nien lives in Hue</i>
<i>b) No, she doesn't.</i>


<i>c) She wasn't old enough to be in my</i>
<i>class.</i>


<i>d) Nien is going to visit Hoa at Christmas</i>


S1: <i>Where does Nien live</i> ?
S2: ....


S1: <i>Does Lan Know Nien</i> ?


S2: ....


- Check and copy the right
answers.


<b>4. Consolidation (3 )</b>


- T reminds Ss to remember :


<i>+ What do/does + S + look like ?</i>



<i>+ To be (not) adj + enough + to do ST. </i>
<i>+ Hoa' s talking</i>.


<b>5. Homework: (2 )</b>


- T conducts Ss to do exercise 1- P.5 (work book).
- Prepare the next lesson: Speak.


Week 01 <sub>Date of planning</sub> <sub>21/8/010</sub>


Period 03 <sub>Date of teaching</sub> <sub>26/8/010</sub>


<b>Unit 1: My friends</b>


Speak+Listen


<b>A.The aims and requests.</b>
<b>1. Objectives. </b>


By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to describe a person.
<b>2.Teaching points </b>


+ Attributed and predicative adjectives .
+ S + have / has + adj + hair


+ S + be + adj


- Ss train speaking skill.
<b>3. Preparation</b>


<i>+ Teacher</i>: Text book, work book, collected pictures about some people,



extra-board ...


<i>+Students</i>: Text book, work book, school things, picure ....


<b>B. Procedures.</b>
<b>1. Organization: (1 )</b>


+Good morning!How are you today?Who’s absent today?
<b>2. Checking up/Warm up: (5-7’)</b>


T’ activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1. Warm up : </b><i><b>Brainstorming</b></i>


- Ask Ss to think of the adjectives used
to describe body build and hair .


* Possible answers :


- fat


-straight


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(6)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=6>

thin




long



long


- tall
- short


-Color : black / dark


- overweight


blond / fair


- slender (gầy


,mảnhkhảnh)

brown



grey


<b>3. New lesson:</b>


T’ activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1. Speaking</b>
<b> Pre-speaking</b>
<b>*1.1 Presentation : </b>
-Read the dialogue


- Show Ss a picture of Mary and ask them to


describe her hair , her body build .


Ex : She has long blond hair
She is short and thin


<b>Form S + have / has + adjective + hair </b>
<b> S + be + adjectives </b>


<b>* Practice :</b>


<b>+ Word cue drill </b>


- Prepare 6 cards so that students can drill
easily .


a. He / tall / thin
b. She / short / slim
c. He / short / fat
d. Long / black
e. Curly / blond
f. Straight / brown


- Ask Ss to read their complete sentences


6


4


Look at the picture and read the
example aloud about ( Hoa and


Lan)


Copy and give some examples .


Work individually


Read the sentences aloud .
<b> hair</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(7)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=7>

aloud


<b>Correct and give feedback </b>
a. He is tall and thin .


b. She is short and slim .
c. He is short and fat .
d. She has long black hair .
e. She has curly blond hair .
f. She has straight brown hair .
<b>.While-speaking </b>


<b>2.Now take turns to make similar </b>
<b>dialogue .Use the ADJ in the table</b>


- Ask Ss to look at six people in their books .
- Call on a student to describe one person , the
others have to guess who he / she is


* Example :



S1 : This person is short and thin . She has
long blond hair .


S2 : Is this Mary ?
 Yes


- Go on until six people on the poster are
described


<b>. Post speaking : </b>


- Ask Ss to write all the sentences they have
described above .


<b>2. Listening</b>


<b>2.1. Pre- listening: </b>


- Ask Ss to look at the expressions in the box
and make sure they know their meanings .
How do you do ?


Nice to meet you


It is a pleasure to meet you .
I would like you to meet
Come and meet


- Get Ss to guess and to complete four
dialogues , using the given expressions .



- Have Ss read their predictions and write them
on the board


<b>2.2. While - Listening : </b>


- Let Ss listen to the tape twice .


5


5


8


Practice speaking in front of
class.


Look at the expressions in the
box .


Read them aloud .
Copy down


Guess the complete expressions
in the dialogues .


Read their predictions
Listen to the tape carefully
Work in pairs and compare
with their predictions



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(8)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=8>

- Get Ss to work in pairs to complete the
dialogues and compare with their predictions .
- Call on some pairs to demonstrate the
dialogues in front of class .


<b>- Correct and give feedback </b>
1. I would like you to meet ....
2. Nice to meet you ,


3. I would like you to meet ...
4. It,<sub>s a pleasure to meet you , </sub>
5. Come and meet


6. How do you do ?


- Ask Ss to practice speaking the dialogues .
<b>2.3. Post - Listening :</b>


- Call on some Ss to play roles of Nam – Hoa
– Thu / Khai – Mrs Lien – Mrs Vi / Ba – Bao –
Grandmother / Mr Lam – Mrs Linh – Mr
Thanh and practice the dialogues .


- Correct their pronunciation


- Let Ss work in pairs to practice the dialogues
8


Play roles to practice the
dialogues



<b>4. Consolidation : (2 )</b>


- Do the exercises in workbook .
- Prepare the next lesson .


<b>5. Home work: (1)</b>


- T asks Ss to learn by heart the dialogues


Week 02 <sub>Date of planning</sub> <sub>28/8/010</sub>


Period 04 Date of teaching 31/8/010


<b>Unit 1: My friends</b>


<b>Read</b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(9)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=9>

By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to describe character, use some adjectives.
<b>2. Teaching points</b>


+ Structure: Review


+ Vocabulary: <i>Kind, social, generous, hard-working, reserved, out-going,</i>
<i>sense of humor</i>,...


- Ss train reading skill.
<b>3. Preparation</b>


<i>+Teacher</i>: Text book, work book, tape and cassette player ...



<i>+ Students</i>: Text book, work book, school things, ....


<b>B. Procedures.</b>
<b>1. Organization: (2)</b>


+Good morning!How are you today?Who’s absent today?
<b>2. Checking up/Warm up: (5-7’)</b>


T’ activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1. Checking up </b>


- T asks Ss to releplay the dialogues of the last
lesson .


<b>2. Warm up</b>


- Hold the class to play <i><b>"</b><b>Find someone who</b></i>".
<b>Find someone who ...</b> <b>Name</b>


<i>usually helps other people</i>
<i>doesn't speak a lot in public</i>
<i>always goes to the library</i>
<i>sometimes tells funny stories</i>
<i>smile a lot</i>


...


3



5


<b>3. New lesson:</b>


T’ activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1. Pre-reading</b>
- Make questions


+ Which adjectives do you use to describe the
one who always helps other people ?


+ The one always tells jokes


- Present some new words of the passage.


<i>+Kind: (adj) tư tÕ</i>


<i>+Socible:(adj) hồ đồng</i>
<i>+Generous:(adj) rộng lợng</i>
<i>+Hard-working: chăm chỉ</i>
<i>+Reserved(adj) dè dặt</i>


5


- Take part in the game, use
the T' s suggestions.


S1: Who usually helps other
people ?



S2: It' s Quang ...
- Ss' answers may be
(<i>kind / helpful</i>)
(<i>humorous</i>)


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(10)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=10>

<i>+Out-going: th©n thiƯn</i>
<i>+Sense of humor: hµi híc</i>


<i> + Annoy (v) : làm khó chịu, bực mình</i>
<i> + orphanage (n) : trại trẻ mồ côi</i>


- Ask Ss to scan the reading and predict.
<b>2. While-reading</b>


- Play the tape about Bao, Khai, Song and Ba.
(3 times)


- Give the right As.


<b>1.Choose the best answer and write</b>
a) - <i>three </i>


b) - <i>doesn't affect his school work</i>.
c) - <i>don't talk much in public</i>


d) - <i>get tired of</i>


- Ask Ss to read the text again and answer
<b>2. Now answer the Qs</b>



- Ask Ss to practice in front of the class.
* The right answers:


<i>a) He feels lucky to have a lot of friends.</i>
<i>b) Bao is the most sociable.</i>


<i>c) Khai likes reading.</i>


<i>d) A bad thing about Ba' s jokes is that</i>
<i>sometimes his jokes annoy his friends.</i>


<i>e) He spends his free time doing volunteer</i>


<i>work at a local orphanage</i>.


<b>3. Post-reading</b>


- Explain some new words and then let Ss
practice reading the text.


<i>Friendly, smart, honest, sensitive, pleasant,</i>
<i>shy, flexble, ambitious, reliable, optimistic > <</i>
<i>pessimistic</i>,...


13


7


Scan the reading and tell how


many people the text
describes.


(<i>The text is about Bao, Khai,</i>


<i>Song and Ba</i>).


- Listen to the tape (look at
bok)


- Read the text carefully then
do exercise 1 (P.14)


- Copy the right As.


- Work in pairs


S1: <i>How does Ba feel having </i>
<i>a lot of friends ?</i>


S2: <i>He feels lucky to have a</i>
<i>lot of friends</i>.


- Copy and practice reading.
<b>4. Consolidation: (2)</b>


- Ss repeat and remember some words of describing someone' s characters.
<b>5. Home work: (1)</b>


- T asks Ss to learn the new words by heart. Do exercise 1 of language focus.


Prepare for writing.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(11)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=11>

Period 05 <sub>Date of teaching</sub> <sub>01/9/010</sub>

<b>Unit 1: My friends</b>



<b>write</b>


<b>A.The aims and requests.</b>


<b>1. Objectives. </b>


-By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to write a passage to describe someone 's
character,...


<b>2.Teaching points</b>
+ Adjectives...


- Ss train writing skill.
<b>3. Preparation</b>


<b>+</b><i>Teacher</i>: Text book, work book, extra-board ...


<b>+</b><i>Students</i>: Text book, work book, school things, ....
<b>B. Procedures.</b>


<b>1. Organization: (2)</b>


- Good morning!How are you today?
- Who’s absent today?


<b>2. Checking up/Warm up: (5-7’)</b>



T’ activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1. Checking up </b>


- T asks Ss to write and read the new words
by heart in front of the class.


<b>2. Warm up</b>


- Divide the class into two groups, then give
two questions, the group which answers
correctly and fastest wins the game.


<i>a) How many people are there in the</i>
<i>picture?</i>


<i>b) What is each person wearing?</i>


2


5 - Look at the picture on P.17
quickly (30 seconds). Then
close books.


- Answer the questions
a) <i>4 people</i>


b) <i>The man is wearing an</i>
<i>orange shirt ..., the woman is</i>


<i>wearing a</i> ...


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(12)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=12>

T’ activities T Ss’ activities
<b>1. Pre-writing</b>


- Ask: <i>What information is there on the</i>
<i>card</i> ?


- Hang on extra-card and explain the pesonal
card (part 1)


<b>1.1.Read the information about Tam</b>


<i><b>Tên</b></i> <i><b>Lê Văn Tám, tuổi 14</b></i>
<i><b>Hình dáng</b></i> <i><b>Cao, gầy, tóc ngắn và đen</b></i>
<i><b>Tính tình</b></i> <i><b>Hồ đồng, hài hớc, hay</b><b><sub>giúp đỡ ngời khác</sub></b></i>
<i><b>Địa chỉ</b></i> <i><b>26 phố Trần Phú, HN</b></i>
<i><b>Gia đình</b></i> <i><b>Bố, mẹ, anh trai - Hùng</b></i>
<i><b>Bạn bè</b></i> <i><b>Ba, Bảo</b></i>


- Ask:


<i>+ What is his name?</i>
<i>+ How old is he?</i>


<i>+ What does he look like?</i>
<i>+ What is he like?</i>


<i>+ Where does he live?</i>



- Conduct Ss to do part 2 (suggested
questions P.15)


<b>1.2.Fill in a similarform for your partner…</b>
a)What is his/her name ?


b) How old is he/she ?


c) What does he/ she look like ?
d) What is he/she like ?


e) Where does he/she live ?
f) Who does he/she live with ?
g) Who is/are his her friends ?
<b>1.3Now the paragraph</b>


<b>2. While-writing</b>


- Conducts Ss to use the writing sample in
part 1 and the answers in part 2, write a
paragraph about their friends.


- Call an some Ss to read their writing in front
of the class.


<b>3. Post-writing</b>


- Asks Ss to write a passage to describe one
of their family member's appearances, use



10


10


- Ss to look at 1 (P.15) ,answer
the T' s suggested question.


(tên, tuổi, địa chỉ, ...)


- Look at the card and listen to
the T.


Ss' answers may be:


<i>+ Le Van Tam</i>
<i>+ 14</i>


<i>+ He is tall and thin. He has</i>
<i>short black hair</i>


<i>+ He is sociable, humorous</i>
<i>and helpful.</i>


<i>+ He lives at 26 Tran Phu</i>
<i>Street, Hanoi</i>


- Do part 2 (fill in a similar
formyou’re your partner).


<b>- Ss' answers may be:</b>



a<i>) Her namr is Mai</i>


<i>b) 14</i>


<i>c) She is tall and thin ...</i>


<i>d) She is helpful and sociable...</i>
<i>e) She lives at 12 Hoan Kiem</i>
<i>street.</i>


<i>f) She lives with her parents</i>
<i>g) Nga, Giang, Lan</i> ...


- Write a paragraph about a
friend.


Example:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(13)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=13>

suggested words.


EX: <i>My grandfather' s name is Quang and he</i>


<i>is eighty years old. He</i> ...


<i>short, long, gentle, sociable, helpful,</i>
<i>friendly, kind, sensitive, pleasant,</i> ....


10



- Write to describe


EX: <i>My father' s name is Giang</i>


<i>and he is fifty years old. He</i> ...
<b>4. Consolidation: (2)</b>


- Ss repeat and remember some adjectives to describe someone' s appearances
and characters.


<b>5. Home work: (2)</b>


- T asks Ss to do exercise 7 - P.11 (work-book) and exercises of language focus.


Week 02 <sub>Date of planning</sub> <sub>30/8/010</sub>


Period 06 <sub>Date of teaching</sub> <sub>04/9/010</sub>


<b> Unit 1:language focus</b>


<b>A.The aims and requests.</b>


<b>1. Objectives.</b>


-By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to use the simple present tense to talk
about general truths and describe someone 's appearances,...


<b>2.Teaching points</b>
+ Simple tenses


+ “S +tobe(not) + adj + <i>enough</i> + to- infinitive”.


- Ss' knowledge, doing exercises.


<b>3. Preparation</b>


<i>+Teacher</i>: Text book, work book, ....


<i>+Students</i>: Text book, work book, school things, extra-board ....


<b>B. Procedures.</b>
<b>1. Organization: (2 )</b>


+Good morning!How are you today?Who’s absent today?
2. Checking up/Warm up: (5-7’ )


T’ activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1. Checking up </b>


- T asks Ss to read their writing aloud in
front of the class.


Answer may be: <i>Her name' s Ng,</i>
<i>she is 13 years old. We met last</i>
<i>summer. She lives at Son Duong</i>
<i>town with her brother. She is</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(14)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=14>

<i>short and thin and has long brown</i>
<i>hair</i> ...


<b>2. Warm up</b>



- Divide the class into two groups, give 4
letters at the same time..


1) a b c d


2) g h i j


3) k l m n


4) o p q r


4 - Find out 4 adjs beginning with the<sub>4 letters given.</sub>
- Answers may be:


1) awful big clever
dirty.


2) great heavy intelligent
jealous


3) kind lovely mean new
4) old poor quite rich


<b>3. New lesson:</b>


T’ activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1. Complete the paragraphs</b>



- Hang on extra-boards that are about 2
paragraphs of exercise 1.


Answers:


<b>a) 1- lives ; 2- sent ; 3- was ; 4- is</b>
<b>b) 1- are; 2- came; 3- showed;</b>
4- introduced


- Repeat the past simple tense


Note: The past simple tense is usually
used with <i>yesterday, last (year), </i>...


<b>2.</b>


<b> Complete the dialogue</b>


- Repeat uses of the present simple tense.


<i>(The present simple tense is used to</i>
<i>express the repeated / habitual actions</i>
<i>which happen daily, to describe actions</i>
<i>which are always known as the truth ...).</i>


Answers:
(1)- sets
(4)- is


(2)- goes


(5)- is


(3)- moves
(6)- is
<b>3.</b>


<b> Look and describe</b>
- Ask:


a) How many people are there in the
picture ?


b) What does each person look like ?


6


6


10


(The team which finishes first gets
one mark).


- Look at the paragraphs and some
verbs that are not in the right form,
then read the passages and put the
verbs in the present simple and past
simple tense.


- Practice reading the completed


paragraphs


- Listen to the T and then complete
the dialogue. Use the correct form
of the verbs in the box.


- Look at the picture (P.17) and
then answer the questions.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(15)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=15>

c) What is each person wearing ?
Answers:


<i>a) There are 4 people in the picture.</i>
<i>b) There is a thin, tall woman; there is a</i>
<i>tall, heavy man; there is a boy sitting on</i>
<i>the ground , ...</i>


<i>c) The man is wearing a yellow shirt and</i>
<i>black trausers. The woman is wearing a</i>
<i>green skirt and red blouse, she is</i>
<i>carrying a shoulder bag. The boy is</i>


<i>wearing a blue shorts and a white shirt</i> .


<b>4.</b>


<b> Use </b><i><b>(not) adjective + enough</b></i>
* Form:


<i>[to be (not) adjective + enough +</i>



<i>to-infinitive]</i>



* Meaning:


(đủ/không đủ ... để làm việc gì đó)


- Ask Ss to complete and practice the
dialogue in pairs.


EX:


A:Can you put the groceries in your
bag ?


B: No, It is <i><b>not big enough</b></i> to carry
everything.


Answers:


a) <i>not big enough</i>


b) <i>not old enough</i>


c) <i>strong enough</i>


d) <i>good enough</i>


8


- Ss review



- Ss complete and practice the
dialogue in pairs.


-copy the answer


<b>4. Consolidation: (2 )</b>


- T reminsds Ss to remember the present simple and past simple tenses, <i>be (not)</i>
<i>adjective + enough + to-infinitive,</i> ...


<b>5. Homework: (2 )</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(16)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=16>

Week 03 <sub>Date of planning</sub> <sub>9/9/10</sub>


Period 07 <sub>Date of teaching</sub> <sub>14/9/10</sub>


<b>Unit 2: making arrangements</b>



<b>Getting started - Listen and Read</b>


<b>A.The aims and requests.</b>


<b>1. Objectives. </b>


- By the end of the lesson Ss get on with cultual communication on phone, and use
the telephone to make and confirm arrangements.


<b>2.Teaching points</b>


+ <i>Would you like ... ? Let' s ....</i>


<i>+ Can I speak to ..., please ? </i>
<i>+ Would you like ... ?</i>


<i>+ Let' s + V ...</i>


Vocabulary: downstairs > < upstairs ...
- Ss train communicatve skill.


<b>3. Preparation</b>


<b>+</b><i>Teacher:</i> Text book, work book, extra-board, tape and cassette player...


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(17)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=17>

<b>B. Procedures.</b>
<b>1. Organization: (2 )</b>


+Good morning!How are you today?Who’s absent today?
<b>2. Checking up/Warm up: (5 )</b>


<b>3. New lesson:</b>


T’ activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1. Getting started</b>


- Make suggested question:


<i>How do you know about telephone</i> ?


- Hang extra-board on BB:
a



a a fax machine


b an answermachine


c a mobile phone


d an address book


e a public telephone


f a telephone dire...


- Give the right answers.


a An answermachine máy trả lời ĐTTĐ


b a mobile phone T di động


c a fax machine m¸y fax


d a telephone dire.. danh bạ điện thoại
e a public telephone ĐT công cộng
f an address book sổ ghi địa chỉ


<b>2. Listen and read</b>
- Give questions:


<i>+ Who made the call?</i>
<i>+ Who introduced herself?</i>



<i>+ Who invited the other to the movie?</i>
<i>+ Who arranged a meeting place?</i>
<i>+ Who arranged the time?</i>


<i>+ Who agreed to the time?</i>


15


5


- Ss' answers may be:


(<i>more comfortable, conecting</i>


<i>people</i>, ...)


- Look at extra-board and work
in groups to check the meaning
of the words in the box and
match them with the right
picture.


(Ss' s predictions)
a a fax machine
b a mobile phone
.... ....


- Check and copy the right
answer.



- Talk about usefulness of those
objects.


<i>+ to send fax.</i>


<i>+ to find someone’s telephone</i>
<i>number.</i>


<i>+ to write addresses and</i>
<i>telephone number.</i>


<i>+ to make a phone call in a</i>
<i>street telephone box.</i>


<i>+ to leave and take messages.</i>
<i>+ to make phone call anywhere</i>
<i>you like. </i>


- Predict answers .
EX:


+ <i>Nga made the call.</i>


<i>....</i>


- Review and copy


+ Reading telephone number



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(18)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=18>

- Review some structures about
communication on telephone, advices, ...


<b>1.1Practicethe dialogue</b>


- Introduce new words and phrases:


<i>downstairs > < upstairs</i>
<i>(díi nhµ) (trên gác)</i>


<i>It' s a bit far from my house - (nó cách nhà tôi</i>
<i>khá xa)</i>


- Play the tape (Hoa and Nga)
- Let Ss practice the dialogue
- Play the tape again (twice)


2.2 Read the dialogue again.Then…..


-Check Ss’sanswer and correct


7


8


<i>+ Would you like ... ?</i>
<i>+ Let' s + V ...</i>


- Read in chorus / individually
- Write down



- Listen to the tape


- Practice the dialogue in pairs
- Listen to the tape again and
check the predictions.


Answers:


a) <i>Nga made the call.</i>


b) <i>Nga introduced herself.</i>


c) <i>Nga invited Hoa to the</i>
<i>movies.</i>


d) <i>Nga arranged a meeting</i>


<i>place.</i>


e) <i>Hoa arranged the time.</i>


f) <i>Nga agreed with the time</i>.
<b>4. Consolidation: (3 )</b>


-Ss repeat and remember words, phrases and structures about communication on
phone.


<b>5. Homework: (2 )</b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(19)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=19>

Week 03 <sub>Date of planning</sub> <sub>9/9/09</sub>


Period 08 <sub>Date of teaching</sub> <sub>15/9/09</sub>


Unit 2: making arrangements
Speak+listen
<b>A.The aims and requests.</b>


<b>1. Objectives. </b>


By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to make communications on phone, and
make an arrangement ..


And complete a telephone message by listening.
<b>2.Teaching points</b>


- Structure: review the near future "<i>be going to</i>...."


- Vocabulary: review.. Make an appointment, to be available...
- Ss train speaking,listening skill.


<b>3. Preparation</b>


<b>+ </b><i><b>Teacher</b>:</i> Text book, work book, picture ...


<b>+ </b><i><b>Students</b>:</i> Text book, work book, school things, ....
<b>B. Procedures.</b>


<b>1. Organization: (2 )</b>



+Good morning!How are you today?Who’s absent today?
<b>2. Checking up/Warm up: (5-7’)</b>


T’ activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1. Checking up</b>


- T asks one student to read his/her
writing in front of the class.


- T corrects mistake
<b>2. Warm up</b>


3


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(20)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=20>

- Hold the class to play <i><b>Noughts and</b></i>
<i><b>Crosses</b></i>.


Fax
machine


Telephone


book Movie


Theater Address <sub>book</sub> Answering<sub>machine</sub>
Arrange Invite introduce


- Play the game



<b>3. New lesson:</b>


T’ activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1. Pre-speaking</b>
- Ask Ss


<i>+Where is the dialogue carried out ?</i>


<i>+ What is it about</i> ?


<b>1.1Put the sentence ……</b>
- Ask Ss to give their answers.
- Give the right As:


1 - b 2 - f 3 - j 4 - a
5 - i 6 - c 7 - e 8 - k
9 - g 10 - h 11 - d


- Make coprehension's Qs:


<i>+ Are they talking on the phone ?</i>
<i>+ What do they intend to do ?</i>
+ What time are they meeting ?


Where ?


<b>2. While-speaking</b>


- Conduct Ss to look at a open


dialogue (part 2), that is about Ba and
Bao who are making arrangements to
play chess.


<b>2.2 Complete the dialogue</b>


- Repeat <i>"be going to ..."</i> (what we
intend to do in the future)


- Call some pairs to practice in front
of the class.


5


7


- Look at a dialogue 1 (P.20) whose
sentences are not in good order.


Ss' answers may be:


<i>+ on phone</i>


<i>+ make an arrangement</i>


- Work in pairs to put the sentences in
the correct order.


- Check the answers.



- Ss' answers may be:


<i>+ Yes</i>


<i>+ They intend to go to the pop concert.</i>
<i>+ They are meeting at 7.15. Inside the</i>
<i>center.</i>


.


Answers:


Bao: <i>May I speak to Ba, please ?</i>


Bao: <i>I am fine, thanks. And you ?</i>


Bao: <i>Can you play chess tonight ?</i>


Bao: <i>What about tomorrow afternoon ?</i>


Bao: <i>I'll meet you at Central Chess</i>
<i>Club</i>


Bao: <i>Is 2.00 o'clock OK ?</i>


- Practice making similar arrangements.
EX:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(21)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=21>

<b>3. Post-speaking </b>



- Hang the picture on BB <sub>5</sub>


S2: <i>May I speak to Lan, please ? This</i>


<i>is Hoa.</i>


S1: <i>Hello Hoa. How are you ?</i>


S2: <i>I am fine, thanks. And you ?</i>


S1: <i>Me too.</i>


S2: <i>Can you go to see movie tonight ?</i>


S1: <i>I am sorry ...</i>


S2: <i>What about tomorrow evening ?</i>


S1: <i>Yes, tomorrow evening is fine.</i>


S2: <i>I'll meet you at ...</i>


S1: <i>Is 7.00 P.m OK ?</i>


S2: <i>Great. See you</i> ...


- Work in pairs to look at the picture
and practice making similar
arrangements, base on the sample one.



<b>1. Pre-listening</b>
- Make questions:


+ What will you say if you are the
caller?


+What will you say if you are the
receive ?


+ What will you say if the person
you want to speak to is out ?


If we are the receive:


- Hang on the extra-board that is
about a dialogue on phone between
a woman and the secretary of the
principal at Kingston Junoir High
School. This woman wants to talk to
the principal.


<b>2. While-listening</b>
- Play the tape (3 times)


- Explain new words and phrases:


<i>+Make an appointment: hĐn gỈp</i>
<i>+To be available: r¶nh</i>


- Ask Ss to give their answers


<b>3. Post-listening</b>


5


7


- Answer the T's quetsions.


<i>+ Can I leave a message for ... ?/ Can</i>
<i>you take a message ... ?</i>


<i>+ Would you like to leave a message ?</i>


- Predict a telephone message


<b>Kingston Junoir High School</b>


Date: ... Time: ...
For: ...
Message: ...
Telephone number: ...


- Listen to the tape and fill the missing
information in the card.


- Write down and read
- Give answers


<b>Kingston Junoir High School</b>



Date: Tuesday...Time: .9.45...
For: ... <i>The Principal</i> ...


Message: <i>Mrs Mary Nguyen wanted to see</i>
<i>you at 9.45 in the morning.</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(22)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=22>

- Give snetences then ask Ss to
<b>correct mistakes</b>


1. <i>Can I speak with Mr Quang,</i>
<i>please ?</i>


2. <i>I'd like to do an appointment with</i>
<i>the dentist ?</i>


3. <i>Would you like to live a</i>


<i>message ?</i>


4. <i>He will be available in Monday</i>


5


- Correct the mistakes in the following
sentences.


Answers:


1. <i>with </i> <i> to </i>2. <i>do </i> <i> make</i>



3. <i>live </i> <i><sub> leave</sub></i> <sub>4. </sub><i><sub>in </sub></i> <i><sub> on</sub></i>


4. Consolidation: (2)


- Ss repeat and remember : <i>Could I have .... ?; Would you like to hold or ... ?</i>


<b>5. Home work: (1)</b>


- T conducts Ss to do exercise 3, 4 P-16-17 (workbook)


Week 03 <sub>Date of planning</sub> <sub>15/9/09</sub>


Period 9 <sub>Date of teaching</sub> <sub>17/9/09</sub>


Unit 2:making arrangements
Read


<b>A.The aims and requests.</b>
<b>1. Objectives. </b>


- By the end of the lesson Ss will know more about the person who invented the
telephone: Alexander Graham Bell. Ss will be able to write a telephone message
<b>2.Teaching points</b>


+ Review past simple tense.


+ Vocabulary: <i>Deaf-mutes, experiment, transmit, invent (v), invention (n), conduct,</i>
<i>experiment. </i>


<i>- Furniture delivery</i><b> , </b><i>to be out, reach SB, customer, pick SB up</i> ...


- Ss train reading skill.


<b>3. Preparation</b>


<b>1 </b><i>Teacher</i>: Text book, work book, tape and cassette player, extra-board ...


<b>2 </b><i>Students</i>: Text book, work book, school things, ....
<b>B. Procedures.</b>


<b>1. Organization: (1 )</b>


+Good morning!How are you today?Who’s absent today?
<b>2. Checking up/Warm up: </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(23)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=23>

T’ activities T Ss’ activities
<b>1. Pre-reading</b>


- Make some suggested questions
a,Who is in the picture ?


b,What do you know about him ?
c, What did he invente ? When ?


- Hang pictures (like one P. 21) on the
BB and present some new words and


phrases:


<i>+Emigrate: di c</i>



<i>+Deaf-mutes: tËt võa câm vừa điếc</i>
<i>+Experiment: thí nghiệm</i>


<i>+Transmit: truyền, phát tín hiệu</i>
<i>+Invent (v): phát minh - invention (n)</i>
<i>+Conduct (experiment): tiến hành TN</i>
<i>+an exhibition (n) :triển lãm</i>


<b>1.1True or False ?</b>


- <b>Ask Ss to read the statements (on</b>


extra-board) and do T/ F prediction:
a) Alexander G.Bell was born in the
USA.


b) He worked with deaf-mute patients
in a hospital in Boston.


c) Thomas Watson was Bell’s
assistant.


d) Bell and Watson introduced the
telephone in 1877.


e) Bell experimented with ways of
transmitting speech between
deaf-mutes.


f) Bell demonstrated his invention at a


lot of exhibitions.


<b>2. While-reading</b>
- Play the tape (twice)


- Conduct Ss to read about one of the
greatest scientists in the world, the
inventor of telephone - Alexander
Graham Bell, and then decide whether
the statements are True or False. Tick
() the true statements and correct
<b>the false ones.</b>


<b>1.2Put the event ….</b>


- Get Ss to read the events of Bell’s
10


20


- Look at a picture (P.21), discuss and
answer the questions


<i>(Alexander Graham Bell)</i>
<i>(an inventor)</i>


<i>(Who invented the telephone)</i>


- Look at the picture



- Read in chorus/individuallly.
- Write down


- Look at extra-board and do T/ F statements
prediction:


order guess check corect


A T/F F F


B …. F


C …. T


D …. F


E …. F


F …. T


- Listen to the tape.


- Read the text on P.21-22 and check
predictions.


Answers:


<i>a) </i><b>F.</b><i> He was born in Edinburgh,</i>
<i>Scotland</i>.



b) F. <i>He workedwith deaf-mutes at</i>
<i>Boston University</i>.


c) T


d) F. <i>Bell and Watson introduced the</i>
<i>telephone in 1876 (not 1877)</i>


e) F. <i>Bell experimented with wayx of</i>
<i>transmitting speech over a long</i>
<i>distance.</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(24)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=24>

life (P.22)


- Ask Ss to compare with their
partners.


- Call Ss to give their As.


<b>3. Post-reading</b>
- Ask Ss to practice


10


- Read the events of Bell’s life and put
them in the correct order.


- Compare As with partners.
The right As:



Alexander Graham Bell ...


1) <i>was born in Scotland.</i>


2) <i>went to live in Canada.</i>


3) <i>went to live in the United States.</i>


4) <i>worked with people neither speak</i>


<i>nor hear.</i>


5) <i>worked with Thomas Watson.</i>


6) <i>successfully demonstrated his</i>


<i>inventions.</i>


7) <i>invented the telephone.</i>


- Read the text about Alexander
Graham Bell again and translate it into
Vietnamese.


- Answer


<i>(Yes / No)</i>


<b>4. Consolidation: (2 )</b>



- Ss repeat and remember the main informations of Alexander Graham Bell
<b>5. Home work: (2 )</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(25)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=25>

Week 04 <sub>Date of planning</sub> <sub>17/9/09</sub>


Period 10 <sub>Date of teaching</sub> <sub>21/9/09</sub>


Unit 2:making arrangements
Write


<b>A.The aims and requests.</b>
<b>1. Objectives. </b>


- By the end of the lesson Ss will know more about the person who invented the
telephone: Alexander Graham Bell. Ss will be able to write a telephone message
<b>2.Teaching points</b>


+ Review past simple tense.
+ Vocabulary:


<i>- Furniture delivery</i><b> , </b><i>to be out, reach SB, customer, pick SB up</i> ...
- Ss train reading skill.


<b>3. Preparation</b>


<b>+</b><i>Teacher:</i> Text book, work book, tape and cassette player, extra-board ...


<b>+</b><i>Students:</i> Text book, work book, school things, ....
<b>B. Procedures.</b>



<b>1. Organization: (1)</b>


+Good morning!How are you today? Who’s absent today?
<b>2. Checking up/Warm up:</b>


<b>3. New lesson</b>


Teacher’s activities T Ss’s activities
<b>1. Pre-writing</b>


- Ask Ss


<i>+ Have you ever taken a telephone</i>
<i>message?</i>


<i>+ What should be mentioned in the</i>
<i>message when you take a message?</i>


<b>1.1Read the message</b>


Look at Thang Loi Delivery Service.


Date: ngµy nhËn tin
Time: thêi gian nhËn tin
For: tin gưi cho ...


Message: néi dung tin nh¾n
Taken by: ghi l¹i bëi


6



<i>(Date, time, who sent, to whom,</i>
<i>content)</i>


- Explain the form and new word of
the given message.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(26)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=26>

New words:


<i>-Furniture delivery: chuyển giao đồ đạc</i>
<i>- take a masege: </i>


-To be out: vắng mặt


-Reach SB: cú th gp ai ú qua ĐT


<i>-Stationery order - đơn đặt hàng văn</i>
phòng phẩm.


<b>2. While-writing</b>
Answers:


(1) telephoned (2) May 12


(3) speak (4) took


(5) name (6) delivery


(7) Mr.Ha (8) at



<b>3. Post-writing</b>


<b>1.2 Now read thepassage below</b>


<b>Thanh Cong Delivery service</b>
Date: ...


Time: ...
For: ...
Message: ...
Taken by: ...


14


16


5


- Ss work and check As with
partners.


* Work at home to write telephone
message.


- Ss read then write.


- Ask Ss to fill in the gaps in the
passage.


- Call on Ss to give their answers



- Conduct Ss to read a passage then
write the telephone message in their
study-cards.


- Collect some messages and correct
on


-Have ss copy the answer


* Work at home to read the message
form on page 23 again, then help
Lisa write message for Nancy. Use
the information from the dialogue.
-Ask ssto do at home


<b>4.Consolidation (2)</b>


-T asks Ss to sum up the content of the lesson
<b>5. Homework (1)</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(27)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=27>

Week 04 <sub>Date of planning</sub> <sub>17/9/09</sub>


Period 11 <sub>Date of teaching</sub> <sub>22/9/09</sub>


Unit 2:making arrangements
Language focus
<b>A.The aims and requests.</b>


<b>1. Objectives. </b>



<i>By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to talk about intentions with be going </i>
<i>to and know how to use Adverbs of place .</i>


<b>2.Teaching points</b>


<i>be going to and know how to use Adverbs of place</i>


<b>3. Preparation</b>


<b>+ </b><i>Teacher</i>: Textbooks , posters , chalks ....


<b>+</b><i> Students</i>: Text book, work book, school things, ....
<b>B. Procedures.</b>


<b>1. Organization: (1)</b>


+Good morning!How are you today?Who’s absent today?
<b>2. Checking up/Warm up: (5-7’)</b>


Contents T Teacher’s and Ss’s activities
<b>1. Warm up : </b>


<b>Telephone transmitting</b> 5


3. New lesson


Contents T Teacher’s and Ss’s activities
<b>1.Talk about intentions with going </b>



<b>to : Introduce the form and use of </b>
<b>going to.</b>


- Form : S + be going to +


<b>infinitive </b>


- Use : express an intention


<b>Ex1.Work with apartner……..</b>
- Example :


T : Nga has a movie ticket . What is
she going to do ?


S : She is going to see a movie .
:


a. They are going fishing


b. She is going to read the new model
c. She is going to do her homework .
d. He is going to watch an action


6


10


Listen and copy down



Work in pairs
Ex 1 :


- Ask Ss to do exercise 1 . They


have to work with a partner and
say what the people are going to
do


Read the example


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(28)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=28>

movie on TV tonight .


e. She is going to give him a birthday
present .


<b>Ex 2 : Complete the list (</b>
<b>Questionnaire ) </b>


a) Ask Ss to work in pairs
.


b) Get Ss to work in pairs
.


<b>2. Adverbs of place </b>
* Jumbled words


- Let Ss work individually , one
student one word



1. tdeousi = outside
2. siiden = inside
3. hetre = there
4. erhe = here
5. stupairs = upstairs
6. wonstaird = downstairs


<b>Ex 3 : Complete the speech bubbles</b>
.


<i>a. Where is Tuan ? I think he is </i>
<i><b>upstairs </b></i>


<i>b. No , he is not <b>here .</b></i>


<i>c. He is not downstairs and he is not </i>
<i>upstairs .</i>


<i>d. Perhaps , he is </i><b>outside .</b>


<i>e. No , he is not <b>there </b>. </i>


<i>f. I am not <b>outside</b> . I am <b>inside</b> , Ba. </i>


6


10


- Correct and give feedback



- Call on some pairs to demonstrate in
front of class .


- Listen and give feedback


- Have some pairs demonstrate in front
of class .


Read their complete sentences
- Give feedback


Work in pairs


Stick in column “You “ and Your
partner


- Demonstrate in front of class .
- Ask Ss to go to the board and write
the meanings words .


- Call on some Ss to read all the
adverbs aloud .


Work individually , one student one
word


Go to the board to write the meanings
and read them aloud .



-Use each adverb in the box once .
- Set the scene : “ Ba is playing hide
and seek with his cousin , Mr Tuan “
- Let Ss work in pairs , then compare
with another pair ( at their table )


- Call on some Ss to read out the speech
bubbles


- Give feedbac


<b>4.Consolidation (2)</b>


-T asks Ss to sum up the content of the lesson
<b>5. Homework (1)</b>


.Copy the complete exercises in their notebooks .


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(29)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=29>

Week 0 4 <sub>Date of planning</sub> <sub>17/9/09</sub>


Period 12 <sub>Date of teaching</sub> <sub>24/9/09</sub>


Unit 3: at home


Getting started - Listen and Read
<b>A.The aims and requests.</b>


<b>1. Objectives. </b>


- By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to understand the dialogue and use


model verbs to talk about the housework.


<b>2.Teaching points</b>


+ Modals "<i>have to</i>", "<i>ought to</i>", <i>reflexive pronouns</i>.... ,


+ Vocabulary: myself, yourself / yourselves, himself, herself, ourselves,
<i>hemselves, itself...</i>


- Ss train communicatve skill.
<b>3. Preparation</b>


<b>+</b><i>Teacher</i>: Text book, work book, extra-board, tape and cassette player...


<b>+</b><i>Students</i>: Text book, work book, school things, ....
<b>B. Procedures.</b>


<b>1. Organization: (2 )</b>


+Good morning!How are you today?Who’s absent today?
<b>2. Checking up/Warm up: (5-7’)</b>


3. New lesson


Contents T Teacher’s and Ss’s activities
<b>1. Checking up </b>


<b>* Complete the sentences with the</b>
<b>adverbs given.</b>



<i>(downstairs, there, outside, here)</i>


a, I live ... , in this town.


b, He fell .... and broke his wrist.
c, Don't go ...., it's too cold.


d, we like that city so much there we are
going .... again this yet


<b>Getting started</b>


-> Use the picture cues drill :
a. do the washing up


b. make the bed
c. sweep the floor
d. cook dinner
e. tidy my room
f. feed the chickens
٭٭Listen and read


<b>1. Pre- teach Vocabulary : </b>


5


<b>Key: a. </b><i>here; </i>b. <i>downstairs ; </i>
<i>c</i>. <i>outside ; d,there</i>


Listen and copy down .



Ask ss,when you are at home
what do you do in the morning ?
Ss look at the pictures


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(30)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=30>

- a steamer : nồi hấp
- a cup board


- a sauce pan
- chore
- a sink


- Set the scene of the dialogue between
Nam and his mother , Mrs Vui .


<i><b> - cook dinner .</b></i>


<i><b> </b></i><b>Nam has to</b><i><b> - go to the market to buy </b></i>
<b>fish and vegetables</b><i><b>.</b></i>


<i><b> - call his Aunt , Ms Chi </b></i>
<i><b>and ask her to meet his mother at </b></i>
<i><b>grandma</b><b>,</b><b><sub>s house </sub></b></i>


-> Form :


<b>Has / Have to + Infinitive = Must + </b>
<b>Infinitive </b>


Model : What do you have to do ?


I must do the washing up .
<b>1.1 practice the dialogue…..</b>


* Have Ss to practice the dialogue in
pairs .


<b>1.2 Read the dialouge again</b>


<i>Beginning with</i> : On Sunday morning , I


have to tidy my room ...


- Call on some Ss to read their writings in
front of class.


- Correct mistakes if any and ask them to
copy .


Ask some questions


- Turn on the tape and ask Ss to
look at their books


and read their complete sentences :
Listen to the tape while looking at
their books .


- Ask Ss to complete the list of the
things Nam has to do .



Read their sentences they have
completed


Copy and give examples


- Call on some Ss to practice in
front of class


Practice in pairs


- Ask Ss to write the lists of the
things they have to do on Sundays
.


Read the dialogue in pairs .
Write individually


Demonstrate their writings


<b> 4. Consolidation: (3)</b>


- T reminds Ss to remember chores, modals <i>have to, ought to</i>,<i>reflexive</i>
<i>pronouns</i>....


<b>5. Homework: (2)</b>


- Ss make 10 sentences, use modals <i>have to, ought to</i>, <i>reflexive pronouns</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(31)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=31>

Week 05 <sub>Date of planning</sub> <sub>20/9/010</sub>



Period 14 <sub>Date of teaching</sub> <sub>28/9/010</sub>


Unit 3: at home
SPEAK
<b>A.The aims and requests.</b>


<b>1. Objectives. </b>


By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to use the prepositions of place to talk
about the positions of furniture in the house.


<b>2.Teaching points</b>


- Structure: review


- Vocabulary: review<i> on, in, opposite, between</i>, ...
- Ss train speaking skill.


<b>3. Preparation</b>


<b>+</b><i><b>Teacher</b>:</i> Text book, work book, pictures of rooms ,...
<b>+</b><i><b>Students</b>:</i> Text book, work book, school things, ....
<b>B. Procedures.</b>


<b>1. Organization: (2)</b>


+Good morning!How are you today?Who’s absent today?
<b>2. Checking up/Warm up: (5-7’)</b>


Contents T Teacher’s and Ss’s activities


<b>1.Checking up </b>


<b>2. Warm up</b>


- Hold the class to play <i><b>Networks</b></i>.
table


3


4


- T asks some students to read
their sentences (that they wrote at
home) in front of the class.


- T corrects mistakes.
- Find words about home.


<b>3. New lesson:</b>
<b>1. Pre-speaking</b>


- Ask Ss the positions of the items in the
pictures.


Where is the clock?
Where is the fruit?
Where are the flowers?
Where is the rice cooker?
Where is the cupboard?



10 - Look at the picture and answer.
Ss' answers may be.


<i>It’s is on the wall </i>
<i>It’s in the bowl. </i>
<i>They are on the table </i>


<i>It’s next to the bowl of fruit. </i>


<i>It’s on the wall, above the counter. </i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(32)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=32>

Where are the knives?
Where is the dish rack?
<b>2. While-speaking</b>


Answer key:


<i>- The calendar is on the wall, above the</i>
<i>stove and the sink.</i>


<i>- The sink is next to the stove.</i>


<i>- The knives are on the wall, under the</i>
<i>cupboard.</i>


<i>- The flowers are on the table.</i>


<i>- The bowl of fruit is between the rice</i>
<i>cooker and the rack.</i>



<i>- The clock is on the wall, above the</i>
<i>refrigerator</i>.


....


<b>3. Post-speaking</b>


- Ask Ss to look at words and funitures
(Part 2) and then match each word with
suitable funiture.


- Explain new funitures:


<i>+Rug - tấm thảm trải sàn</i>


<i>+Coffee table - bàn ngồi uống cà phê </i>


10


10


<i>They are on the wall, under the ... </i>
<i>It’s on the counter, next to the bowl </i>
<i>of ..</i>


- Get Ss to work in groups, talking
about the position of each item in the
picture.


- Call Ss to talk in front of the class


and correct mistakes.


- Work in groups to practice talking.
<i><b>E.g:</b></i> The calendar is on the wall,
<i>above the stove.</i>


The knives are on the wall, under
the cupboard.


- Read words aloud.


- Call some groups to practice in
front of the class.


- Work in groups to arrange the
funiture.


EX:


S1: <i>Let's put the armchair opposite</i>
<i>the couch.</i>


S2: <i>OK. And I think we ought to put</i>


<i>the rug between the armchair and</i>
<i>the couch</i>.


Go on: (coffee table, magazines,
telephone, stereo, clock, picture, ...)



<b>4. Consolidation: (3)</b>


- T hangs the picture on BB.


- Ss look at the picture and tell the position of each item.
<b>5. Home work: (1)</b>


- T asks Ss to write to describe the position of funitures in their house.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(33)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=33>

Period 15 <sub>Date of teaching</sub> <sub>30/9/09</sub>
Unit 3: at home


LISTEN+LANGUAGE FOCUS
<b>A.The aims and requests.</b>


<b>1. Objectives.</b>


- By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to know more about the necessary
ingredients to cook <i><b>The Special Chinese Fried Rice</b></i>.


<b>2.Teaching points</b>
+ Structure: Review


+ Vocabulary: About food, ...
- Ss train listening skill.
<b>3. Preparation</b>


<b>+ </b><i>Teacher</i>: Text book, work book, tape and cassette player, picture


<b>+ </b><i>Students:</i> Text book, work book, school things, ....


<b>B. Procedures.</b>


<b>1. Organization: (1)</b>


+Good morning!How are you today?Who’s absent today?
<b>2. Checking up/Warm up: (20)</b>


Contents T Teacher’s and Ss’s activities
<b>1. 15ms test </b>


- T holds the class to do 15ms test.


<b>Question 1: Choose the best word to</b>
<b>complete the sentences. (3 pts)</b>


1) He often ... the washing up on
Sundays.


A. make B. does


C. set D. do


2) Lan ... the kichen yesterday.
A. cleaned B. made


C. feed D. did


3) My younger sister likes ...
her dog.



A. sweeping B. doing
C. feeding D. cleaning
4) I ... to make the bed every
morning.


A. make B. have


C. has D. ought to


5) We ought to put our
1


5 <b><sub>Answers:</sub></b>


<b>Question 1: </b>
<b>Question 2: </b>
<b>Question 3: </b>


a) There is a cassette on the
table.


b) The picture is on the wall.
c)There are some book on the
shelf.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(34)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=34>

books ... the desk.


A. T.V B. lamp


C. telephone D. on



6) Minh has to ... the fish tank
everyday.


A. tidy B. to tidy


C. cook D. feed


<b>Answer.</b>


1 b 4b
2 a 5d
3c 6 a


<b>Question 2: Complete the sentences</b>
<b>with a reflexive pronoun: </b><i>(ourselves;</i>
<i>herself ; themselves; myself; himself;</i>


<i>yourself</i><b>).</b> <b>(3 pts)</b>


a. You can't do that ...


b. Nam has to do


homeworks ...


c. I have to cook dinner ...
d. Mai and Lan stood in front of the mirror
and looked at ...



e. Who made this skirt for her ? - Nobody,
She made it ...


f. We protect ... from the rain
with an umbrella.


<b>Answer.</b>


<b>A.yourself D.themselves</b>
B.himself E. herself
C. Qs F.ourselves


<b>Question 3: Use the cues to write</b>
<b>sentences. </b><i><b>(4 pts)</b></i>


a. There / a cassette / is / table / on.
b. The / on / picture / is / the wall.
c. There / some books / on the
shelf / are.


d. We / ought to / in / our bag / put /
the English book.


<b>2. Warm up</b>


- Hold the class to play "Bingo".


* Suggested list of food: chickens, beef,
cake, candy, noodles, garlic, bread, rice,....



5


Copy the answer


Copy the answer


- Listen carefully and
shout “bingo” if win the
game.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(35)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=35>

T
<b>1. Pre-listening</b>


- Help Ss to name the objects in the
picture.


<i>+Rice - c¬m </i>
<i>+Noodles - mì</i>


<i>+Saucepan - chảo sốt </i>
<i>+Frying pan - chảo rán.</i>
<i>+Garlic - tỏi </i>


<i>+Onions - hành</i>


<i>+Green peppers - ớt xanh </i>
<i>+Peas - đậu </i>


<i>+Ham - thịt đùi</i>



<b>2. While-listening</b>
- Play the tape (3 times)


- Ask Ss to give their answers.


- Play the tape again to correct Ss'
answers


Answer:


<i>a) fried rice</i>
<i>b) pan</i>


<i>c) garlic and green peppers</i>
<i>d) ham and peas.</i>


<b>3. Post-listening</b>


- Conduct Ss to make <i><b>lettuce salad</b></i>.
- Give suggested ingredients:


<i>Lettuce, carrot, a few onions, some</i>
<i>tomatoes, a cucumber, an apple, salad</i>
<i>oil, salt</i>, ...


* Suggested Recipe:


<i>- First of all wash the lettuce, drain it,</i>
<i>put it into a large salad bowl.</i>



<i>- Slice the carrot and add to the lettuce/</i>
<i>- Chop up the onion and put them in.</i>


8


12


10


- Ss look at the pictures (P.30)
and name the objects in the
picture.


...


- Make a list of food then call
out each word in a loud voice.


- Read the words


- Hang the picture on BB then
ask: Can you predict what
ingredients they need to cook
the "<i>Special Chinese Fried</i>
<i>Rice</i>" ?


- Work in groups to guess
what ingredients they need to
cook the "<i>Special Chinese</i>
<i>Fried Rice</i>".



EX: <i>rice, frying pan</i>, ...


- Listen to a conversation


about the necessary


ingredients to cook the
"<i>Special Chinese Fried Rice</i>".
Then decide which are the
necessary ingredients and
utensils to cook this food by
choosing the corect pictures in
the book.


- Check predictions


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(36)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=36>

<i>- Cut the cucumber and the tomaroes</i>
<i>into thin slices and add them.</i>


<i>- Take the core out of the apple, chop it</i>
<i>into small pieces and put them in.</i>


<i>- Add some salad oil</i> ...
<b>4. Consolidation: (2 )</b>


- T reminds Ss to remember the ingredients and racipe for the "<i>Special Chinese</i>
<i>Fried Rice</i>", <i><b>lettuce salad</b></i>.


<b>5. Home work: (1 )</b>



5- T asks Ss to write down ingredients and recipe for barbecue kebobs. (thịt nớng xiên)


Week 06 <sub>Date of planning</sub> <sub>1/9/09</sub>


Period 16 <sub>Date of teaching</sub> <sub>25/9/09</sub>


Class 8A


Unit 3: at home
Read
<b>A.The aims and requests.</b>


<b>1. Objectives.</b>


- By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to understand more about the safety
precautions in the house.


<b>2. Teaching point.</b>


+ Structure: "<i>why - because</i>".<i> Let + SB + do ST </i>


+ Vocabulary: <i>safety precautions, chemicals, drug, matches, electrical sockets,</i>
<i>scissors, bead...</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(37)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=37>

<b>3. Preparation</b>


<b>+ </b><i>Teacher:</i> Text book, work book, tape and cassette player ...


<b>+ </b><i>Students</i>: Text book, work book, school things, ....


<b>B. Procedures.</b>


<b>1. Organization: (2 )</b>


+Good morning!How are you today?Who’s absent today?
<b>2. Checking up/Warm up: (5-7</b>’)


T’ activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1.Checking up</b>


- T asks one student to give the and
recipe for barbecue kebobs.


* Ingredients: <i>Meat, vegetables, </i>
<i>charcoal, marinade</i>, ...


* Recipe:


<i>+ First, put the charcoal in the</i>
<i>barbecue and light it with lighter fluid.</i>
<i>+ Then cut up some meat and</i>
<i>vegetables and put them in a bowl with</i>
<i>your favorite barbecue marinade.</i>
<i>Marinade for 20 minutes.</i>


<i>+ Next, put the meat and vegetables on</i>
<i>the skewers.</i>


<i>+ After that, put the kebobs on the</i>


<i>barbecue and cook for 10 to 15 minutes,</i>
<i>turning them over from time to time.</i>
<i>+ Finally, take th kebobs off the</i>


<i>barbecue and enjoy</i>.


7


<b>3. New lesson:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(38)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=38>

<b>1. Pre-reading</b>


- Hold the class to play


<i><b>Brainstorming</b></i>.


(Dangerous things for children)


- Present some words about
dangerous things for children in the
home.


<i>+safety precautions: c¶nh báo an</i>
<i>toàn</i>


<i>+objects: vật</i>


<i>+chemicals: ho¸ chÊt</i>
<i>+drug: thuèc</i>



<i>+matches: diêm</i>


<i>+electrical sockets: ổ cắm điện</i>
<i>+scissors: kéo</i>


<i>+bead: hạt, vật tròn nhỏ.</i>


- Ask Ss to do true/false predictions.
(Part 1- P.31)


<b>2. While-reading</b>


- Play the tape about <i><b>safety</b></i>
<i><b>precautions in the home</b></i>. (twice)
- Ask the groups to give their
answers.


- Correct and give the right answers.


- Ask Ss to look at part 2 (P.32) .
Explain some model sentences


<i>Let + SB + do ST (để cho ai làm gì)</i>
<i>Cause a fire (gây ra hoả hoạn)</i>
<i>Electricity can kill (Điện có thể gây</i>
<i>chết)</i>


10


15



- Take part in the game by giving
things that may be dangerous for
children


drug electric
fire


knife


boiling water gas
- Copy


- Read the words in chorus then
individually


- Read the statements (part 1) and
predict which is true, which is false.


- Listen to the tape and decide whether
the given statements from (a) to (f) are
True or False.


- Check predictions


- The groups give answers
1. Answers.


<i>a) False. It is safe to keep medicine in</i>



<i>locked cupboards</i>.


<i>b) True</i>


<i>c) False. A kitchen is dangerous place</i>
<i>to play.</i>


<i>d) False. Playing with one mtach can</i>
<i>cause a fire.</i>


<i>e) True.</i>
<i>f) True</i>.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(39)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=39>

- Let Ss ask and answer in pairs.
- Ask some pairs do in front of the
class.


<b>3. Post-reading</b>


- Conduct Ss to work in groups and
discuss about :


<i>+ Safety precautions in the street.</i>


<i>+ Safety precautions at school</i>.


11


- Read the passage again and do part 2
(Ask and answer).



- Work in pairs in front of the class.
Answer key:


<i>a) Because children often try to eat</i>
<i>and drink them.</i>


<i>b) Because the kichen is a dangerous</i>
<i>place.</i>


<i>c) Because playing with matches can</i>
<i>cause a fire.</i>


<i>d) Because children often try to put ST</i>
<i>into electrical sockets, electricity can</i>
<i>kill</i>


<i>e) Because</i> <i>the dangerous objects can</i>


<i>injure or kill childrern.</i>


- Work in groups to discuss the topics
<b>4. Consolidation: (2 )</b>


- T reminds Ss to remember the safety precautions in the home.
<b>5. Home work: (1 )</b>


- Ss do exercise 5 -P24 (workbook). Prepare for writing


Week 07 <sub>Date of planning</sub> <sub>27/9/09</sub>



Period 17 <sub>Date of teaching</sub> <sub>29/9/09</sub>


Class 8A


Unit 3: at home
Write
<b>A.The aims and requests.</b>


<b>1. Objectives.</b>


- By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to write a description of a room in
their house.


<b>2.Teaching points</b>
+ Structure: Review


+ Vocabulary: <i>Dish rack, towel rack, beneath, lighting fixture, flour,...</i>


- Ss train writing skill.
<b>3. Preparation</b>


<b>+</b><i>Teacher:</i> Text book, work book, ...


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(40)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=40>

<b>1. Organization: (2 )</b>


+Good morning!How are you today?Who’s absent today?
<b>2. Checking up: (5-7</b>’)


Teacher’s activities T Ss’s activities


<b>1. Checking up </b>


- T asks one student to give the safety
precautions in the home.


<b>3. New lesson:</b>


Teacher’s activities T Ss’s activities
<b>4. Consolidation: </b>


<b>5. Home work: </b>


Week 07 <sub>Date of planning</sub> <sub>27/9/09</sub>


Period 18 <sub>Date of teaching</sub> <sub>1/10/09</sub>


Class 8A


Unit 3: at home


Language focus 1,2
<b>A.The aims and requests.</b>


<b>1. Objectives.</b>


- <i>By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to use the Reflexive Pronouns , modal</i>


<i>verbs to talk about the house work and know how to use Why - Because . </i>


<b>2.Teaching points</b>



<i>Reflexive Pronouns , modal verbs to talk about the house work and know how </i>
<i>to use Why - Because . </i>


<b>3. Preparation</b>


<b>+</b><i> Teacher</i>: Textbook , boards , chalks ...


<b>+</b><i>Students:</i> Text book, work book, school things, ....
<b>B. Procedures.</b>


<b>1. Organization: (2)</b>


+Good morning!How are you today?Who’s absent today?
<b>2. Checking up/Warm up : (5-7</b>’)


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(41)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=41>

<b>1.Warm up </b>


<b> *Brainstorming </b>
- tidy up


- do our homework
Things you - cook


can do - water flower
- clean the floor
- repair the machine
- fix the TV set
Things you - paint the house
can not do -



- Call on some Ss to talk with “ Can “
- Listen and correct mistakes if any


5


<b>3. New lesson:</b>


Teacher’s activities T Ss’s activities
<b>1. Language focus : </b>


1. Reflexive pronouns
- Set the scene “ You do your


homework and no one helps you . What
do you say ? “


I do my homework myself .
-> Explain the reflexive Pronouns
- > Form : We use I with myself


You ... yourself /
yourselves


He ...himself
She ...herself
We ...ourselves
They ...


themselves



It ... itself
- Emphasis pronouns : Used to
emphasize a person or a thing .
Eg : She cut herself .


John saw himself in the mirror .
 Complete the dialogue :


- Ask Ss to fill in the blanks with


suitable reflexive pronouns or emphasis
pronouns .


- Call on some pairs to practice
speaking .


- Give feedback :


a. himself b. ourselves c. myself /
8


8


Write down and give examples


- Work in pairs to complete the
dialogue


- Practice speaking



Listen and copy


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(42)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=42>

yourself


d. himself / herself / themselves e.
yourself .


- Ask them to practice the complete
dialogue .


<b>2. Modal verbs </b>


- Set the scene : “ Hoa is very sad
because she failed her English test .
What do you say to advise her ? “
“ You should study harder “


 Another word for “ should “ :
Ought to


Ought to + Infinitive


- Ex 2 : Ask Ss to give advice to people
in the pictures ( Language focus 2 )
- Call on some pairs to practice in front
of class .


- Give feedback :



a. I failed my English test .
You ought to study harder
b. You ought to get up earlier .
c. You ought to eat more fruit and
vegetables .


d. You ought to see a dentist .


* Checking : Noughts and crosses :
His tooth /


ache


Hoa / late My room /
untidy
The


floor /
dirty


Bao /
overweight


She / thin
My


English /
bad


Hergrades /


bad


The
washing
machine /
not work
 Using “ Should “ to play game .
Ex 1 : Look at the pictures . Complete
the dialogue , Use Must or Have to and
the verbs in the box :


- Ask Ss to work in pairs to practice the
dialogue :


- Call on some pairs to demonstrate in
front of class.


- Give feedback


1. must / have to tidy


10


6


6


Play game


Work in pairs



-> Demonstrate in front of class .


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(43)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=43>

2. have to / must dust
3. must / have to sweep
4. must / have to clean
5. have to / must empty
6. must / have to feed
<b>4. Consolidation: 2’</b>


- Sum up the content of the lesson
<b>5. Homework: 2’</b>


-Do exercise 4 ( language focus 4 )
-Copy all the exercises above .
-Prepare the test .


Week 07 <sub>Date of planning</sub> <sub>27/9/09</sub>


Period 19 <sub>Date of teaching</sub> <sub>2/10/09</sub>


Class 8A


Unit 3: at home
Revision
<b>A.The aims and requests.</b>


<b>1. Objectives.</b>


- By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to write a description of a room in


their house.


<b>2.Teaching points</b>
+ Structure: Review


+ Vocabulary: <i>Dish rack, towel rack, beneath, lighting fixture, flour,...</i>


- Ss train writing skill.
<b>3. Preparation</b>


<b>+ </b><i>Teacher</i>: Text book, work book, ...


<b>+ </b><i>Students</i>: Text book, work book, school things, ....
<b>B. Procedures.</b>


<b>1. Organization: (1)</b>


+Good morning!How are you today?Who’s absent today?
<b>2. Checking up: (5-7</b>’)


Teacher’s activities T Ss’s activities
<b>1.Checking up</b>


- T asks one student to give the safety
precautions in the home.


5


<b>3. New lesson:</b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(44)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=44>

<b>I.Simple Tense</b>


<b>1. Present simple tense</b>
[ S + V(s/es)]


<b>2.Past Simple</b>
[S + V(qk)]


<b>3. Present simple to talk about general </b>
<b>truth.</b>


-Asks ss to do the ex 1,2 on P16.


<b>II.(Not) adjs + enough + to-infinitive</b>
<b>-Asks ss todo the ex4 on P17.</b>


<b>III. Talk about intentionws with ‘be </b>
<b>going to’</b>


[ S + am/is/are + going to-infinitive]
-Asks ss to do the ex 1,2 on P 25
<b>IV. Adverbs of places</b>


-outside<>inside.
- there<>here.


-upstairs<>downstairs.


Asks ss to complete the speech bubbles in
the ex 3 on P 26.



<b>V.Reflexive pronouns</b>


-mysself/yourself/himself/herself/itself.
-themsselves/ourselves/yourselves.
Asks ss to do ex3 on P36.


<b>VI.Modals.</b>


[S +must/oguht to + infinitive]
[S +have/has+ to-infinitive]


- Asks ss to do the ex 1,2 on P34,35.
<b>VI. Why- Because.</b>


- Asks ss to do the ex 4 on P 36.


8


6


4


4


6


6


- Listen then copy down



-Do the ex 1,2
-Copy down


- Copy the form and do the ex.


- Copy the form and do the ex.


<b>4. Consolidation: 2’</b>
<b>5. Homework: 1’</b>


Week 08 <sub>Date of planning</sub> <sub>2/10/09</sub>


Period 20 <sub>Date of teaching</sub> <sub>6/10/09</sub>


Class 8A


Test 45’
<b>A.The aims and requests.</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(45)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=45>

- By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to <i>summarize the knowledge they have</i>
<i>learnt to do the test well . </i>


<b>2.Teaching points</b>
<b>3. Preparation</b>


<b>+ </b><i>Teacher</i>: Papers , chalks and boards .
<b>+</b><i> Students</i>: review at home


<b>B. Procedures.</b>


<b>1. Organization: (1)</b>


+Good morning!How are you today?Who’s absent today?
<b>2. Checking up</b>


<b>3. Test 45’</b>


I / Complete these sentences with the suitable words or phrases in the brackets
1. I ( read / am reading / am going to read )a book about astrology at the moment
2. We ( go / are going / will go ) to a party on Saturday .


3. Nurses ( look / are looking / are going to look ) after people in hospital .
4. Jane ( comes / is coming / will come ) form Ireland .


5. I( speak / am speaking / will speak ) speak four languages .


6. ( Do you want / are going to want / are wanting ) to go out tonight ?


II / Put the sentences into the right order to make a logical dialogue : ( 1,5 ps )
a. Yes , I am


b. Isn,<sub>t that Lan</sub>,<sub>s father , my dear ? </sub>
c. How do you do ?


d. Excuse me ! Are you Mr Viet ?
e. I am not sure . Go and ask him .
f. I am Nam – Hoa,<sub>s father </sub>


1…... 2……. 3……. 4…….. 5……... 6……..



III / Rewrite these sentences , beginning as shown , so that the meaning stays the same
: ( 2,0 Ps )


1. He is not tall , so he can not reach the shelf . => He is not <b>………..</b>


2. The book was interesting . I read it twice . => The book was interesting <b>……..</b>
3. I will phone you tomorrow morning . => I will give <b>……….</b>


4. Putting a knife into an electrical socket is dangerous . => It is dangerous <b>……</b>


IV / Write a paragraph about Lan , using the information in the table : ( 3,0 Ps)
Name : Nguyen Huong Lan


Appearance : thin , tall , short black hair
Characters : friendly , humorous , helpful


Address : 25 Quang Trung Street , Nam Dinh
Family : mother , father , younge sister – Hai
Friends : Mai and Ba


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(46)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=46>

<b>Date : </b>
<b>Time : </b>
<b>For : </b>
<b>Message : </b>
<b>Taken by : </b>


<b>Key</b>
I / 1,5 ps Ss get 0,25 ps for each correct one


1. am reading 2. are going 3. look 4. comes 5. speak 6. Do you want


II / 1,5 ps .


1. d 2. a 3 . c 4 . f 5. b 6. e
III / 2,0 Ss get o0,5 ps for each correct one


1. He is not tall enough to reach the shelf .


2. The book was interesting enough foe me to read twice .
3. I will give you a ring tomorrow morning .


4. Is is dangerous to put a knife into an electrical socket


IV / 3,0 . : Write enough information , grammar correctly , right form
V / 2,o ps


+ Tape script :


<i>A customer telephoned the Thanh Cong Delivery Service on may 11 just twelve </i>


<i>o,<sub>clock . The customer</sub>,<sub>s name was Mr Nam , and he wanted to speak to Mrs Van . Mrs</sub></i>


<i>Van was in a meeting and could not come to the phone . So Ms Toan took a message . </i>
<i>Mr Nam called about his stationery order . He said Mrs Van could reach him at 884 . </i>
<i>846. </i>


<b>4. Collect the tests</b>
<b>5. Homework: </b>


Week 08 <sub>Date of planning</sub> <sub>2/10/09</sub>



Period 21 <sub>Date of teaching</sub> <sub>8/10/09</sub>


Class 8A


Unit 4 : our past


getting started - listen and read
<b>A.The aims and requests.</b>


<b>1. Objectives. </b>


-By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to tell the activities people used to do
in the past


<b>2.Teaching points. </b>


- Pratice listening and reading skills
<b>3. Preparation</b>


<b>+</b><i> Teacher:</i> Text book, work book, radio and tape…


<b>+</b><i>Students:</i> Text book, work book, school things, ....
<b>B. Procedures.</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(47)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=47>

+Good morning!How are you today?Who’s absent today?
<b>2. Checking up: (5-7</b>’)


T’ activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1. Warm up : </b>


<b> Getting started </b>


- Ask Ss to look at the picture and write
the names of the things that do not belong
to the past .


5 * Answers :
- The TV
- The radio
- The mobile
- The light fixture


- Modern clothing / school uniforms
<b>3. New lesson: </b>


T’ activities T Ss’ activities


I / Pre - reading :


1. Pre- teach vocabulary


- to look after = to take care of
- Equipment (n) - example


- a folk tale : Tam Cam is a folk tale
- Traditional ( adj )


- a great grandma (n)


* Checking : What and where


2. T / F statements prediction


- Ask Ss to read the statements and predict
they are true or false .


Statements Guess Key


1. Nga is used to live on
farm


2. Nga ,<sub>s grandma did not go</sub>
to school .


3. She has an easy and
happy life when she was
young .


4. There was not any
modern equipment at her
time .


5. “ The lost shoe “ is a
short story


F
T
F
T
F



- Call on Ss to read their predictions and
write them on the board .


II / While - reading :


- Turn on the tape 2 times and look at their
books to read the dialogue between Nga and
her Grandma to check their predictions
- Ask them to correct the false statements .
1. Grandma used to love on farm


5


5


16


Listen and repeat in chorus ,
individually .


Guess its meanings and copy
down


Play game


Work in groups


- Read their predictions
Listen to the tape and look at
their books to check their


predictions


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(48)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=48>

3. She had a hard life .
5. It is an old folk tale .
* Comprehension :


- Get Ss to work in pairs , asking and
answering questions


- Give feedback


a. She used to live on a farm .


b. Because she had to stay at home and help
her Mom to look after her younger brothers
and sisters .


c. She used to cook the meals , clean the
house and wash the clothes .


d. Her great grandma used to lit the lamp and
her great father used to tell stories .


e. She asked her grandma to tell her the tale “
The lost shoe “


- Ask Ss to practice asking and answering
the questions .


* Fact or opinion



- Have Ss read the statements part 3 and decide
which is a fact and which is a pinion .


<b>Statements</b> <b>Fact Opinion</b>


a. I used to live on a
farm .


b. There was not any
electricity .


c. Mom had to do
everything without the
help of modern


equipment .


d. My father used to tell
us stories


e. The best one was the
lost shoe .


f. Traditional stories are
great .


X
X
X


X


X
X


- Give feedback


III / Post - reading : Survey
Did you use to ...? Name
-Get up late .


-Ride bicycle too fast .
-Go to school .


-Eat too much candy .


-Forget to do your homework


10


Practice asking and answering
the questions .


Read the statements and decide
which is a fact and which is a
opinion .


Practice in groups


Demonstrate in front of class .



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(49)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=49>

- Give feedback by asking Ss some questions
to check “ Who used to get up late / ride
bicycle too fast ...? “


- Write it down .
<b>4. Consolidation: 2’</b>


- Sum up the content of the lesson
<b>5. Homework: 1’</b>


- Learn the old lesson and prepare for new lesson


Week 08 <sub>Date of planning</sub> <sub>2/10/09</sub>


Period 22 <sub>Date of teaching</sub> <sub>9/10/09</sub>


Class 8A


Unit 4 : our past
SPEAK+LANGUAGE FOCUS 4
<b>A.The aims and requests.</b>


<b>1. Objectives. </b>


-By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to use USED TO to talk about the
things they used to do .


<b>2.Teaching points. </b>



- Form: [S + used to + V]
- Ss train speaking skill
<b>3. Preparation</b>


<b>+</b><i> Teacher:</i> Text book, work book,


<b>+</b><i>Students:</i> Text book, work book, school things, ....
<b>B. Procedures.</b>


<b>1. Organization: (1)</b>


+Good morning!How are you today?Who’s absent today?


<b>2. Checking up/Warm up</b>: (5-7’)


T’ activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1. Warm up : </b>
*Jumbled words


- rieletcicty = Electricity
- menttaenterin = Entertainment
- rkmaet = Market


- permasuekt = Supermarket


5


<b>3. New lesson: </b>



T’ activities T Ss’ activities


I/ Pre - speaking :


 Recall the conversation between Nga
and her grandma , then ask “ Where
did Nga,<sub>s grandma always live ? “ -> </sub>
She always lived on a farm .


12


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(50)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=50>

- Ask : “ Another word for <i>always lived</i> “ .
Ask Ss to use Used to to make question and
answer.


“ Where did Nga ,<sub>s grandma use to live ? “ </sub>
She used to live on a farm .


 Form : S + Used to + inf
S + did not use to + inf
Did + S + use to + inf ?


 Expressing a past habit , or an action
usually happened in the past .


 Practice
Word cue drill


a. Live / Hue / Hanoi



b. Have / long hairs / short hairs
c. Get up / late / early


d. Walk to school / bicycle


e. Study / evening / early morning
- Call on some pairs to practice asking and
answering the cues above .


II / While - speaking :


- Get Ss to work in closed pairs , then open
pairs .


- Ask them to compare 2 pictures , using “
USED TO “ to talk about the actions in the
past , using these ideas below :


1. Where did they live in the past ? And
now ?


2. How did they travel ?


3. What is about the electricity ?
4. What is about their life / work ?
5. Did children use to go to school ?
6. What is about their entertainment ?
- Call on some pairs to demonstrate in front
of class



- Give feedback .
* <i>Suggested answers</i> :


1. People used to live in small houses . Now
they live in big houses and buildings.


2. People used to walk . Now they can go by
cars or motorbikes .


3. Now , there is electricity everywhere .
4. People used to work hard all the time .
Now they have a lot of time for


entertainment .


14


Listen and copy


Practice speaking with cues


Work in pairs


Demonstrate in front of class


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(51)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=51>

5. Most children used to stay at home . Now ,
they all go to school .


6. Children used to play traditional games
such as hide and seek , skip rope ...



outdoors . Now , they have a lot of modern
games – video games .


III / Post - speaking : Write it up
- Ask Them to write a complete writing
about the difference of the life in the past
and now.


- Call on some Ss to demonstrate in front of
class .


- Correct common mistakes .
IV/ Language focus 4.


-Asks ss to look at the pictures on P45 and
complete the dialogue by using “ used to”
with the verbs in the brackets


* Key


0. used to stay
1.used to have
2.used to be
3.used to live


10


- Do the exercise 4 on P 45



<b>4. Consolidation: 2’</b>


- Sum up the content of the lesson
<b>5. Homework: 1’</b>


- Write about the things you used to do last year .


<i>Beginning</i> : Last year , I used to get up late . Now , I get up very early and do
morning exercises . ... ... “


- Do exercise in workbook .


- Learn the old lesson and prepare for new lesson


Week 09 <sub>Date of planning</sub> <sub>2/10/09</sub>


Period 23 <sub>Date of teaching</sub> <sub>13/10/09</sub>


Class 8A


Unit 4: our past
listen
<b>A.The aims and requests.</b>


<b>1. Objectives. </b>


-By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to <i>understand the main idea of a story </i>
<i>by listening . </i>


<b>2.Teaching points. </b>


<b>3. Preparation</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(52)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=52>

<b>+</b><i>Students:</i> Text book, work book, school things, ....
<b>B. Procedures.</b>


<b>1. Organization: (1)</b>


+Good morning!How are you today?Who’s absent today?
<b>2.Checking up/Warm up: (5-7</b>’)


T’ activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1. Warm up : </b>
*Pelmanism


run ran fly flew ride rode
eat ate sit sat come came
- Continue until all the cards are finished .


5


<b>3. New lesson: </b>


T’ activities T Ss’ activities


I/ Pre - listening : Introduce the topic of the
listening task


1. Pre – teach vocabulary :



- Foolish (a) = ngÊ ngÈn , ngèc nghiÕch


- greedy ( a) = tham lam
- Gold (n) ( realia )


- to lay -> laid – laid ( Picture )


- amazement (n) = ngạc nhiên , vui nhộn


* Checking : What and where
2. Prediction :


- Ask Ss to predict the moral lesson of the
story .


- Have them look at four titles and guess
which is the most suitable to the story .
- Call on some Ss to read their predictions
and write them on the board .


II / While - listening :
1. Checking the prediction


- Turn on the tape twice and ask them to
check their predictions .


- Call on some Ss to read their results and
give feed back : “ Don,<sub>t be foolish and </sub>
greedy “



- Turn on the tape once more to check their
results again .


2. Find out the verbs in the story :


- Ask Ss what tense is used in the story
( Simple past tense )


- Have Ss listen again and try to write as


5


5


16


10


Listen and copy


Listen and repeat in chorus ,
individually


Copy down
Play game


Work in groups to predict .
Read their predictions
aloud .



Listen to the tape and check their
predictions


Read their results and write
down .


Listen and find out the verbs in
the tape


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(53)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=53>

many verbs as possible . The student who
writes more verbs get good marks .


- Call on some Ss to read the verbs aloud .
- Give feedback: we<i>nt / discovered / laid / </i>
<i>shouted / finished / could not / were / ran / </i>
<i>looked / wanted / decided .</i>


- Ask Ss to give the infinitives of these verbs.
III / Post - listening : <i><b>Mapped dialogue</b></i>
Lan : ...lunch ?


Nga : No . I ate noodles .


Lan : How ... school ?
Nga : I rode a bicycle to school .
Lan : Which subject did you have
yesterday ?


Nga : ... math .



Lan : ...?
Nga : I was at home .


- Ask them to work in pairs to practice the
dialogue .


- Call on some pairs to practice in front of
class .


- Correct and give feedback .


Give the infinitives of these
verbs .


Practice in pairs


<b>4. Consolidation: 2’</b>


- Sum up the content of the lesson
<b>5. Homework: 1’</b>


- Copy the completed dialogue in their notebooks .
- Learn the old lesson and prepare for new lesson


Week 09 <sub>Date of planning</sub> <sub>2/10/09</sub>


Period 24 <sub>Date of teaching</sub> <sub>15/10/09</sub>


Class 8A



Unit 4: our past
read


<b>A.The aims and requests.</b>
<b>1. Objectives. </b>


-By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to <i>understand and retell the story - </i>
<i>The lost shoe </i>


<b>2.Teaching points.</b>


<b>- Practice reading skill</b>
<b>3. Preparation</b>


<b>+</b><i> Teacher:</i> Text book, work book,


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(54)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=54>

<b>1. Organization: (1)</b>


+Good morning!How are you today?Who’s absent today?
<b>2. Checking up/Warm up: (5-7</b>’)


T’ activities T Ss’ activities


1.Warm up :


Brainstorming


Name some folks tales that you have read .
 Possible answers :



- Cây tre trăm t ( one hundred-section


bamboo )


- Tấm cám


- Hoàng tử Cóc ( The frog Prince )
- Đôi hài 7 dặm ( Seven mile shoes )
- Bạch tuyết và bảy chú lùn ( Snow white and
7 dwarfs )


<b>3. New lesson: </b>


T’ activities T Ss’ activities


I / Pre - reading : Introduce the topic of the
passage reading and some new words to Ss .
1. Pre – teach vocabulary :


- cruel (a) = độc ác , ác nghiệt
- upset (a) = worried


- fairy (n) = truỵện cổ tích
- magical (a) -> magically (adv)
- rag (n) ( realia )


- to fall in love with = yªu


- immediately (adv ) = ngay lËp tøc



* Checking : ROR
2. T / F statements predictions


- Ask Ss to work in groups to predict


Statements Guess Key


1. Little Pea,<sub>s father is poor</sub>
farmer


2. Her father got married
again after his wife died .
3. Her new mother was


T
T
F


7


5


Listen and repeat in chorus ,
individually .


Guess its meanings and copy .


Play games


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(55)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=55>

beautiful and nice to her .


4. She worked hard all
day .


5. She did not have new
clothes to take part in the
festival .


T
F


- Call on some Ss to read their predictions
and write them on the board


II / While - reading :


1. Checking the predictions :


- Turn on the tape 2 times and ask them to
look at their text books to check their
predictions and correct the false ones .
- Sentence 3 : Her new mother was cruel to
her .


- Sentence 5 : A fairy gave her beautiful
clothes.


- Call on 2 Ss to read the story – Correct
mistakes if any .


2. Comprehension questions



- Ask Ss to work in pairs answering the
questions


- Call on some pairs to practice asking and
answering .


- Listen and give feedback


a. She was a poor farmer ,<sub>s daughter . </sub>
b. She made her do the chores all day .
c. Before the festival started , a fairy
appeared and magically changed her rags
into beautiful clothes .


d. He decided to marry Little Pea because the
shoe fitted her .


e. Ss answer themselves .


- Call on some pairs to practice in front of
class.


3. Gap filling : Complete the sentences with
words from the story .


- Ask Ss to work in pairs , filling the blanks
with suitable words from the story .


- Call on some Ss to read their complete


sentences aloud .


- Give feedback
a. farmer b. died


c. used d. marry / choose


14


10


Work in groups


Read their predictions


Listen and check their
predictions .


Read their results and correct the
false ones .


Work in pairs to practice asking
and answering the questions
Work in pairs to complete the
sentences


Read their complete sentences .


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(56)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=56>

e. clothes f. lost
III / Post - reading :



 Retell the story


- Have Ss work in pairs , telling the story
again in details ( They can look at the


statements in the gap filling exercise and add
more )


- Call on some Ss to retell the story in front
of class .


- Correct mistakes if any


Work in pairs to retell the story
in details .


Demonstrate in front of class .


<b>4. Consolidation: 2’</b>


- Sum up the content of the lesson
<b>5. Homework: 1’</b>


. Rewrite the story .


. Do exercises in workbook .
. Prepare the next lesson .


Week 09 <sub>Date of planning</sub> <sub>2/10/09</sub>



Period 25 <sub>Date of teaching</sub> <sub>16/10/09</sub>


Class 8A


RETURN AND CORRECT THE TEST 45’
<b>A.The aims and requests.</b>


<b>1. Objectives. </b>


-By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to draw some experience on doing tests
<b>2.Teaching points. </b>


<b> - Correct mistakes ss may often make in the tests</b>
<b>3. Preparation</b>


<b>+</b><i> Teacher:</i> Text book, work book,


<b>+</b><i>Students:</i> Text book, work book, school things, ....
<b>B. Procedures.</b>


<b>1.Organization: (1)</b>


+Good morning!How are you today?Who’s absent today?
<b>2.Checking up/Warm up: </b>


<b>3.Test 45’</b>


T’ activities T Ss’ activities



I / Complete these sentences with the suitable
words or phrases in the brackets


1. I ( read / am reading / am going to read )a book
about astrology at the moment


2. We ( go / are going / will go ) to a party on
Saturday .


3. Nurses ( look / are looking / are going to look )


10 - Listen and copy down
<b>Key</b>


I / 1,5 ps Ss get 0,25 ps for
each correct one


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(57)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=57>

after people in hospital .


4. Jane ( comes / is coming / will come ) form
Ireland .


5. I( speak / am speaking / will speak ) speak four
languages .


6. ( Do you want / are going to want / are wanting )
to go out tonight ?


II / Put the sentences into the right order to make a
logical dialogue : ( 1,5 ps )



a. Yes , I am


b. Isn,<sub>t that Lan</sub>,<sub>s father , my dear ? </sub>
c. How do you do ?


d. Excuse me ! Are you Mr Viet ?
e. I am not sure . Go and ask him .
f. I am Nam – Hoa,<sub>s father </sub>


1…... 2……. 3……. 4…….. 5……... 6……..
III / Rewrite these sentences , beginning as shown ,
so that the meaning stays the same : ( 2,0 Ps )
1. He is not tall , so he can not reach the shelf . =>
<b>He is not ………..</b>


2. The book was interesting . I read it twice . =>
<b>The book was interesting ……..</b>


3. I will phone you tomorrow morning . => I
<b>will give ……….</b>


4. Putting a knife into an electrical socket is
dangerous . => It is dangerous <b>……</b>


IV / Write a paragraph about Lan , using the
information in the table : ( 3,0 Ps)


Name : Nguyen Huong Lan
Appearance : thin , tall , short black


hair


Characters : friendly , humorous ,
helpful


Address : 25 Quang Trung
Street , Nam Dinh


Family : mother , father , younge
sister – Hai


Friends : Mai and Ba


V / Listening comprehension : Listen and complete
the telephone message : ( 2,o ps )


<b>thanh cong delivery</b>
<b>service</b>


8


6


6


8


II / 1,5 ps .


1. d 2. a 3 . c


4 . f 5. b 6. e


III / 2,0 Ss get o0,5 ps for
each correct one


5. He is not tall enough
to reach the shelf .
6. The book was


interesting enough
foe me to read twice .
7. I will give you a ring
tomorrow morning .
8. Is is dangerous to put


a knife into an
electrical socket
IV / 3,0 . : Write enough
information , grammar
correctly , right form
V / 2,o ps


+ Tape script :


<i>A customer telephoned </i>
<i>the Thanh Cong Delivery </i>
<i>Service on may 11 just </i>
<i>twelve o,<sub>clock . The </sub></i>


<i>customer,<sub>s name was Mr </sub></i>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(58)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=58>

<b>Date : </b>
<b>Time : </b>
<b>For : </b>
<b>Message : </b>
<b>Taken by : </b>


<i>stationery order . He said </i>
<i>Mrs Van could reach him at</i>
<i>884 . 846. </i>


<b>4. Consolidation: 2’</b>


- Sum up the content of the lesson
<b>5. Homework: 1’</b>


- Learn the old lesson and prepare for new lesson


Week 10 <sub>Date of planning</sub> <sub>12/10/09</sub>


Period 26 <sub>Date of teaching</sub> <sub>20/10/09</sub>


Class 8A


Unit 4: our past
WRITE


<b>A.The aims and requests.</b>
<b>1. Objectives. </b>



-By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to <i>use Simple Past Tense to write a </i>
<i>folk tale .</i>


<b>2.Teaching points. </b>
<b>3. Preparation</b>


<b>+</b><i> Teacher:</i> Text book, work book,


<b>+</b><i>Students:</i> Text book, work book, school things, ....
<b>B. Procedures.</b>


<b>1. Organization: (1)</b>


+Good morning!How are you today?Who’s absent today?
<b>2. Checking up/Warm up: (5-7</b>’)


T’ activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1. Warm up : </b>
<b> *Chatting</b>


- Ask Ss some questions about imaginary
stories


a. Do you want to read imaginary stories ?
b. Name some of them


c. Which story do you like best ?


d. Have you ever read the story “ how the


tigers got his stripes “ ?


5


<b>3. New lesson: </b>


T’ activities T Ss’ activities


I / Pre - writing : Introduce the aims of the
writing and some new words .


1. Pre- teach vocabulary :


8


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(59)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=59>

- wisdom ( n) : trÝ kh«n
- a stripe (n) ( realia )
- a straw ( n) ( realia )


- a servant (n) : ngời phục vụ , đầy tớ
- to graze ( picture )


- to escape : trèn tho¸t


- to light – lit – lighted ( mime )
* Checking : Matching


<b>A</b> <b>B</b>


1. wisdom a. trèn tho¸t



2. a stripe b. đờng sọc


3. a straw c. ¨n cá , gỈm cá
4. a servant d. trí khôn


5. graze e. rơm rạ


6. escape f . đầy tớ


- Ask Ss to come to the board to match items
on the left with those on the right by drawing
a line connecting the story .


* Reading :


- Ask Ss to read and complete the story .
- Call on Ss to say the meanings of the verbs
in the box .


- Have them work in pairs , using suitable
verbs to fill in the blanks .


- Call on them to read their answers aloud .
- Give feedback


1. appear 2. as 3. said 4. left
5. went 6. lit 7. burned 8. escaped
+ Comprehension questions :



1. where was the man ?


2. What did the buffalo do when the tiger
appeared ?


3. What did the tiger want to know ?
4. What did he do before going home ?


Why ?


5. What did he do when he returned ?
- Call on some pairs to practice asking and
answering the questions above .


II / While - writing :


- Get Ss to do exercise 2 . ( Ss have to
imagine to be a man in order to write the
story )


+ Notice : Change


The man -> I / His -> My


- Ask Ss to work individually , then share
with their partners and correct mistakes .


6


12



10


Listen and repeat in chorus ,
individually .


Guess its meanings and copy


Work individually .


Read the verbs in the box and
say the meanings of them .
Read the complete story .


Work in pairs to practice asking
and answering the questions .


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(60)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=60>

- Take some writings to correct in front of
the class.


- Give suggested answers :


III / Post - writing : Telling the story
- Divide the class into 2 teams . Team A
plays the role of the tiger . Team B plays the
role of the buffalo


- Ask them to work in team , telling the story
Notice :



- Team tiger changes : a / the tiger -> I
- Team buffalo changes : a / the buffalo - >
I


Demonstrate in front of class.


Play the roles of tiger and
buffalo , telling the story .
<b>4. Consolidation: 2’</b>


- Sum up the content of the lesson
<b>5. Homework: 1’</b>


Write the story again , imagine you are :
* The tiger


* The buffalo


- Do exercises in workbook .
- Prepare the next lesson .


Week 10 <sub>Date of planning</sub> <sub>12/10/09</sub>


Period 27 <sub>Date of teaching</sub> <sub>22/10/09</sub>


Class 8A


Unit 4: our past


LANGUAGE FOCUS 1,2,3.


<b>A.The aims and requests.</b>


<b>1. Objectives. </b>


-By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to
<b>2.Teaching points. </b>


<b>3. Preparation</b>


<b>+</b><i> Teacher:</i> Text book, work book,


<b>+</b><i>Students:</i> Text book, work book, school things, ....
<b>B. Procedures.</b>


<b>1. Organization: (1)</b>


+Good morning!How are you today?Who’s absent today?
<b>2. Checking up/Warm up: (5-7</b>’)


T’ activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1.Checking up</b>


- Calls 2 ss to retell the story by playing roles of the
buffalo and the tiger


<b>2. Warm up </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(61)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=61>

Matching



A B Key


1. In a. January 1.a / d


2. On b. 3 p m 2. c / e


3.At c. Wednesday 3. b / f


4. Between d. November 1997 4. f
5. After / Before e. July 2nd <sub>5. b</sub>


f. 7 a m and 9 am
- Call on some Ss to read aloud each phrase .


- Explain the uses of some prepositions of time and
ask Ss to do Exercises


5


Play game


Read the correct phrases
aloud


<b>3. New lesson: </b>


T’ activities T Ss’ activities


I / Practice
1. Ex 3 / page 44



- Ask Ss to work individually , then compare
with their partners .


- Call on some Ss to read their complete
sentences aloud .


- Give feedback


<i>a. on b. in c. between d. at / after e. before</i>


2. Ex 4 : Complete the dialogue :


- Have Ss work in pairs , looking at 4 verbs ,
using USED TO with the verbs “ Live –
Stay – Have – be “ to complete the dialogue
between Nga and Hoa .


- Call on some pairs to practice in front of
class .


- Give feedback .


<i>0. used to stay </i>
<i>1. used to have </i>
<i>2. used to be </i>
<i>3. used to live </i>


II / Further practice :



Deliberate mistakes
- Read aloud some sentences and ask Ss to
listen carefully and try to find out the
mistake . When they hear a mistake , they
stand up and say No then correct it .
Eg : T : I usually stay at home in Sunday
Ss : No , on Sunday , not in Sunday .


a. My father used to play football when
14


16


Work individually .Compare
with their partners .


Read the complete sentences
aloud .


Copy down .
Work in pairs


Practice the dialogue .


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(62)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=62>

he has spare time .


b. She used live in Ha noi .


c. My parents will arrive in 3 o,<sub>lock .</sub>



d. He was born in June the third . Listen and copy .
<b>4. Consolidation: 2’</b>


- Sum up the content of the lesson
<b>5. Homework: 1’</b>


- Learn the old lesson and prepare for new lesson


Week 10 <sub>Date of planning</sub> <sub>10/10/09</sub>


Period 28 <sub>Date of teaching</sub> <sub>23/10/09</sub>


Class 8A


Unit 5: study habits


Getting Started - Listen and Read
<b>A.The aims and requests.</b>


<b>1. Objectives. </b>


- By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to understand the dialogue between Jim
and his Mom about his studying.


<b>2.Teaching points</b>


+ Structure: Review <i>Should, Reported speech</i>


+ Vocabulary: <i>semester, pronunciation, dictionary, ...</i>



- Ss train communicatve skill.
<b>3. Preparation</b>


<b>+</b><i> Teacher:</i> Text book, work book, tape and cassette player...


<b>+ </b><i>Students:</i> Text book, work book, school things, ....
<b>B. Procedures.</b>


<b>1. Organization: 1</b>


+Good morning!How are you today?Who’s absent today?
<b>2. Checking up: </b>


T’ activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1. Warm-up</b>


- Hold the class to do "Net-work" with
school subjects.


7


Chemistry Physics Math


Geography Literature History
<b>3. New lesson:</b>


T’ activities T Ss’ activities



<b>1. Presentation</b>
- Make questions:


10


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(63)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=63>

<i>+ How many subjects do you have a</i>
<i>week ?</i>


<i>+ What are they ?</i>


<i>+ What subjects do you like best ? Why</i>
<i>?</i>


<i>+ How often do you have those</i>
<i>subjects ?</i>


<i>+ What subjects are you good at</i> ?


- Let Ss scan the dialogue between Tim
and his Mom.


- Present new words


<b>3- Practice</b>


- Let Ss do T/F statements prediction.
- Ask Ss to give their predictions


- Play the tape (twice)
- Give the right As.



- Call Ss to practice the dialogue in
pairs


8


questions.


<i>+ We have ....</i>


<i>+ They are Math, Literature, History ...</i>
<i>+ I like El best, because ....</i>


<i>+ We have those on ....</i>
<i>+ I am good at El</i>...
- Scan the dialogue.


- Copy; read in chorus; individually


<i>Report card: phiÕu häc tËp</i>
<i>Be pround of: tù hào về ...</i>
<i>Pronunciation: cách phát âm</i>
<i>Improve: cải thiện về ...</i>
<i>Try one's best: cè g¾ng</i> ....
- Groups predict.


<b>Guess</b> <b>Statements</b>


T Tim was out when his mother
call him



T Tim's mother met his teacher at
school


F Tim's report is poor


F Tim's mother wants him to
improve one thing


F Tim needs to improve his
Spanish grammar


T Tim promised to try his best in
learning Spanish


- Listen to the tape


- Read the dialogue and check predictions.


<b>Ans...</b> <b>Statements</b>


F Tim was out when his mother
call him


T Tim's mother met his teacher at
school


F Tim's report is poor


T Tim's mother wants him to


improve one thing


F Tim needs to improve his
Spanish grammar


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(64)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=64>

<b>4- Production</b>


- Ask Ss to work in pairs, ask and
answer the questions (Part 3- P.47) 5


- Practice asking and answering
Right As:


<i>a. She is Tim s teacher</i>’


<i>b. She gave her Tim s report.</i>’
<i>c. He worked really hard.</i>


<i>d. She said Tim should work harder on</i>
<i>his Spanish pronunciation.</i>


<i>e. She gave him a dictionary</i>.
<b>4. Consolidation: 10</b>


- Ss work in groups to discuss how to improve some subjects.


<b>5. Homework: 1</b>


- T asks Ss to write how to improve subjects that they are not good at.



Week 11 <sub>Date of planning</sub> <sub>10/10/09</sub>


Period 29 <sub>Date of teaching</sub> <sub>27/10/09</sub>


Class 8A


Unit 5: study habits <i><b>(Cont…)</b></i>
Speak


<b>A.The aims and requests.</b>
<b>1. Objectives. </b>


- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to talk about their study habits, and
specific information to fill in a report card.


<b>2.Teaching points</b>


- Structure: review "used to", reported speech


- Vocabulary: <i>Civi education, Physical education, Technology, Biology ...</i>


- Ss train speaking skill.
<b>3. Preparation</b>


<b>+ </b><i>Teacher</i>: Text book, work book, extra-board, tape and cassette player ...


<b>+ </b><i>Students:</i> Text book, work book, school things, ....
<b>B. Procedures.</b>


<b>1. Organization: 1’</b>



+Good morning!How are you today?Who’s absent today?
<b>2. Checking up/Warm up: 5’</b>


T’ activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1.Checking up</b>


- Call 2 Ss to read their writings in front of
the class.


<b>2.Warm up</b>


- Hold the class to play "<i><b>Jumbled words</b></i>"


3


4


- Do "<i><b>Jumbled words</b></i>"


tahms : Maths
retutrelia : Literature
ihglsen : English
ygogepahr : Geography
...


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(65)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=65>

T’ activities T Ss’ activities
<b>1- Speaking</b>



<b>1.1 Pre-speaking</b>


- Ask Ss to answer the questions 1-5 (P.48
- Introduce some subjects:


<i>Civic education: GDCD</i>
<i>Physical education: ThĨ dơc</i>
<i>Technology: C«ng nghƯ</i>
<i>Biology: Sinh</i>


<b>1.2- While-speaking</b>


- Conduct Ss to practice to make reported
speech.


<b>1.3- Post-speaking</b>


- Speak in front of the class:


+ I often do my homework late at night
+ I need to improve Math.


....


<b>2. Listening</b>
<b>2.1- Pre-listening</b>


- Hang the extra-bord that is about a report
card on BB and then make questions:
+ What is this ?



+ How many words do you know ?


- Explain words and phrases of the report
card.


3


6


6


5


- Ask and answer the questions 1-5
(P.48), use real informations.


Ss' answers may be:


S1: When do you do your homework ?
S2: I do my homework after dinner/ after
<i>school / late at night.</i>


S1: Who help you with your homework ?
S2: My parents/ brother/ sister do/does.
S1: ...


S2: ...


- Work in groups of 4 or 5 to report what


you have known about your partners'
studying.


Ss' answers may be:


<i>+ Nam said he did his homework after</i>
<i>dinner.</i>


<i>+ Hoa said her father helped her with</i>
<i>her homework.</i>


<i>+ Lan said she spent two hours studying</i>
<i>Math.</i>


<i>+ Ba said he needed to improve English.</i>
<i>+ Mai said she should do more</i>
<i>grammar exercises</i>


- Report T ' s speech.


+ The T said (that) he did his homework
late at night.


+ The T said (that) he needed to improve
Math....


- Look at the <i>report card</i> and answer the
T's Qs.


+ It' s a report card.


+ (10) words


- Listen and copy
- Read


Behavior-Paticipation: ý thøc tham gia
Satisfactory: To¹i nguỵên


Co-operation: sự hợp tác


Days present: Số ngày có mặt
Days absent: Số ngày vắng mặt


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(66)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=66>

- Ask Ss to do Open prediction.


<b>2.2- While-listening</b>
- Play the tape (3 times)
- Ask Ss to give their As.


- Play the tape again and give the missing
information on the extra-board.


<b>2.3- Post-listening</b>


- Hang an open report card on BB


6


8



= <i>Satisfactory</i> ; U = <i>Unsatisfactory.</i>
- Look at Nga’s report and predict the
missing information and then compare
with their partners’.


- Listen to the tape and check prediction.


- Give As in front of the class
- Right information:


(1) 87 days present
(2) 5 days absent
(3) Participation: S
(4) Listening: C
(5) Speaking: A
(6) Reading: A
(7) Writing: B


- Look at the report card on BB and complete
it.


Name: ... Subject: ...
Class: ... Days absent: ...
Behavior-Paticipation: ...
Listening: ... Speaking: ...
Reading: ... Co-operation:...
Writing: ...


Comments: ...
Date: ...



<b>4. Consolidation: 2’</b>


- T reminds Ss to remember reported speech.
<b>5. Home work: 1’</b>


- T asks Ss to write a report card about his/her last 2 months result.
- T asks Ss to do exercise 3 on P-33 (work book)


Week 11 <sub>Date of planning</sub> <sub>10/10/09</sub>


Period 30 <sub>Date of teaching</sub> <sub>29/10/09</sub>


Class 8A


Unit 5: study habits <i><b>(Cont…)</b></i>


Listen and Language focus 1
<b>A.The aims and requests.</b>


<b>1. Objectives.</b>


<i>-By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to listen for specific information to fill</i>
<i>in a report card . </i>


<b>2.Teaching points</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(67)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=67>

- Ss train listening skill.
<b>3. Preparation</b>



<b>+ </b><i>Teacher</i>: Text book, work book, tape and cassette player ...


<b>+ </b><i>Students:</i> Text book, work book, school things, ....
<b>B. Procedures.</b>


<b>1. Organization: 1’</b>


+Good morning!How are you today?Who’s absent today?
<b>2. Checking up/Warm up: (5-7’)</b>


Teacher’s activities T Ss’s activities
<b>1. Warm up : </b>


*Retelling


- Ask Ss to retell “ How to improve your
English “


5


<b>3. New lesson:</b>


Teacher’s activities T Ss’s activities
I / Pre - listening : Introduce the topic of the


listening and some new words :
1. Pre – teach vocabulary :
- behavior (n) = cach cu sw


- A participant (n) = nguoi tham gia



- Satisfactory >< unsatisfactory (a) = thao
mai


- cooperation (n) = hop tac
- attendance (n) =


- to appreciate = danh gia cao
* Checking : What and where
2. Prediction :


- Ask Ss to look at Nga,<sub>s report and predict </sub>
the missing information and then compare
with their partners .


a. day present (1)
b. Day absent (2)


c. Behavior – participant (3)
d. Listening (4)


e. Speaking (5)
f. Reading (6)
g. Writing (7)


- Call on some Ss to read their predictions
and write them on the board .


II / While - listening :
1. Listen :



- Get Ss to listen to the tape and check their
6


5


12


Listen and copy .


Listen and repeat in chorus and
individually .


Copy down .
Play game


Predict and compare with their
partners .


Report their predictions .


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(68)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=68>

prediction .


- Call on Ss to read their results and give
feedback .


1. 87 days present
2. 5 days absent


3. participation : Spanish pronunciation


4. Listening : Comprehension


5. Speaking : A


6 . Reading : A 7 . Writing : B
2. Comprehension questions :


- Ask Ss to answer some questions about
Nga,<sub>s report card . </sub>


1. Who are Nga,<sub>s parents ?</sub>


2. What is Nga,<sub>s teacher</sub>,<sub>s name ? </sub>


3. What subject was reported ? For what term
?


4. What are the comments ?


5. What does S stand for ? What about F UA
B CD ?


- Ask Ss to listen to the tape again and work
in pairs to answer the questions .


- Call on some pairs to practice in front of
class .


- Give feedback .



III / Post - listening : Survey


Questions You Your


partner
1. When do you do your


homework ?


2. Who helps you with
your homework ?


3. How much time do you
spend on Maths / English /
History / Literature ?


4. Which subject do you
need to improve ?


5. What do you do to
improve your English?


- Ask Ss to work in pairs , asking their
partners questions and taking notes of the
answers .


- Ask Ss to work in groups of 4 0r 5 to report
what they have known about their partners,
study .



10


Read their results .


Work in pairs tom practice asking
and answering the questions .


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(69)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=69>

- Correct mistakes if any .
IV. Language focus 1
.*Adverbs of manner .


- Setting the scene “ Use any word from the
game Pelmanism to complete the following
sentences “


* Form : S + V + a / an + adjective + noun
or : S + be + Adjective


S + V + adverb


* Use : Adj modifies the noun after it / the
subject


Adv modifies the verb of the sentence
.


<i>Exercise 1 / 52</i> : Complete the dialogues


- Ask Ss to work in pairs .



- Call on some pairs to demonstrate in front
of class


- Give feedback .


<i>1. hard 2. fast 3. badly 4. softly</i>


- Ask ss to practice the dialogue in open pairs
5


Listen and copy down


Work in pairs


Demonstrate in front of class .


<b>4. Consolidation: 2’</b>


-Sum up the content of the lesson
<b>5. Home work: 2’</b>


- Write something about your partners,<sub> study habits </sub>


Eg : Lan is my best friend . She works very hard and always get good grades .
she usually does her homework after school


Week 11 <sub>Date of planning</sub> <sub>10/10/09</sub>


Period 31 <sub>Date of teaching</sub> <sub>30/10/09</sub>



Class 8A


Unit 5:study habits <i><b>(Cont…)</b></i>
read


<b>A.The aims and requests.</b>
<b>1. Objectives.</b>


- By the end of the lesson Ss will understand more about skills in learning English.
<b>2.Teaching points</b>


+ Structure: Review


+ Vocabulary:<i>mother tongue, learn by heart, high light, ...</i>


- Ss train reading skill.
<b>3. Preparation</b>


<b>+</b><i>Teacher</i>: Text book, work book, tape and cassette player ...


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(70)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=70>

<b>B. Procedures.</b>
<b>1. Organization: 1’</b>


+Good morning!How are you today?Who’s absent today?
<b>2. Checking up/Warm up: </b>


<b>3. New lesson:</b>


T’ activities T Ss’ activities



<b>1- Pre-reading</b>


- Make questions:


<i>+ Do you like learning English ?</i>
<i>+ How many new words do you try to</i>
<i>learn a day?</i>


<i>+ What do you do when you have a</i>
<i>new word ?</i>


<i>+ How do you learn new words ?</i>


- Play the tape once


- Explain some words and phrases


<i>mother tongue- tiếng mẹ đẻ</i>
<i>to underline - ghạch chân</i>
<i>to highlight - làm nổi bật</i>
<i>to come across - </i>


<i>to stick - đính, gắn ....</i>


<i>- </i>Ask Ss to do<i>Brainstorming </i>about
learning new words.


<b>2- While-reading</b>


- Let Ss read the text and do true /


false statements.


- Ask Ss to give theirs answers.
- Correct and give the right answers.
- Have Ss work in pairs to answer the
questions on p.50.


Answer key:


<i>a. No. They learn words in different</i>
<i>ways.</i>


<i> b. Because they help them to</i>
<i>remember the use of new words.</i>
<i> c. They write examples, put the</i>
<i>words and their meanings on stickets,</i>
<i>underline or highlight them.</i>


<i> d. They may think they can’t do so.</i>
<i>Instead, they learn only important</i>


10


15


- Answer the T' s questions


- Listen to the tape (look at book)
- Write words



- Read words in chorus / individually.


<i>- Work in pairs to make a list of ways</i>
<i>how a learner can learn new words.</i>
Ss' s predictions may be:


<i>+ Learn by heart.</i>


<i>+ Learn through example sentences.</i>
<i>+ Write it on a piece of paper and</i>
<i>stick everywhere in the house.</i>


<i>+ Translate it into mothertongue</i>


<i>+ Write it on a piece of paper and put</i>
<i>it into the pocket to learn whenever</i>
<i>- Read the statements on p.50 then</i>
<i>read the text and dicide which is <b>true</b>,</i>
<i>which is <b>false</b>.</i>


- Right answers:


a) F: (Not all language learners but
only some)


b) T


c) F: (Many learners do not try to
learn)



d) T


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(71)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=71>

<i>words.</i>


<i> e. Revision is necessary in learning</i>
<i>words.</i>


<i> f. Learners should try different ways</i>
<i>of learning words to find out what is</i>
<i>the best.</i>


- Call some pairs to practice in front
of the class.


<b>3- Post-reading</b>


- Let Ss work in groups to complete a
survey.


- Ask Ss to report about their groups.


12


- Work in front of the class.
Ways of learning


words Ha Hoa ...


1. Make a list of
words, their meaning


and learn them by
heart.


2. Write some sample
sentences with new
words.


3. Stick new words
somewhere in the
house.


4. Underline or
highlight the words.
5. Read stories in
English.


6. Learn words
through song.





<b>4. Consolidation: 5’</b>


- T reminds Ss to remember ways of learning new words.


- Ask Ss to do exercise 3 (P.53). Report Miss Jackson's commands ....


<i>+ Miss Jackson asked me to wait outside her office.</i>
<i>+ Miss Jackson told me to give you your report ....</i>


<i>+ Miss Jackson told me to help you with your ....</i>


<i>+ Miss Jackson asked me to meet her .</i>...


<b>5. Home work: 1’</b>


- Write the ways of learning words that you think are the best for you.


Week 12 <sub>Date of planning</sub> <sub>21/10/09</sub>


Period 32 <sub>Date of teaching</sub> <sub>3/11/09</sub>


Class 8A


Unit 5: study habits (<i><b>Cont…)</b></i>
write


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(72)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=72>

- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know the form of a letter in EL and
practice writing a letter to a friend.


<b>2.Teaching points</b>


+ Structure: <i>Form of a letter in El</i>


+ Vocabulary:<i>Lunar New Year Festival , enjoyable, celebrate</i>


- Ss train writing skill.
<b>3. Preparation</b>


<b>+</b><i>Teacher</i>: Text book, work book, extra-board ...



<b>+</b><i>Students</i>: Text book, work book, school things, ....
<b>B. Procedures.</b>


<b>1. Organization: 1’</b>


+Good morning!How are you today?Who’s absent today?
<b>2. Checking up/Warm up: (5-7’)</b>


T’ activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1.Checking up</b>


- Ask 1 or 2 Ss to read their writings in
front of the class.


5


<b>3. New lesson:</b>


T’ activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1- Pre-writing</b>


- Make questions:


<i>+ Have you ever written to someone ?</i>
<i>+ To whom do you usually write ?</i>
<i>+ What do you often write about ?</i>
<i>+ How many parts are there in a</i>


<i>persoanl letter ?</i>


- Present: There are usually 4 parts in
<i>a personal letter.</i>


<i>+ Part 1: Heading (writer's address</i>
<i>and the date)</i>


<i>+ Part 2: Opening (Dear)</i>
<i>+ Part 3: Body of the letter</i>


<i>+ Part 4: Closing (your friends /</i>
<i>Regards ...)</i>


- Give questions:


<i>+ Who wrote the letter ? to whom ?</i>
<i>+ Who received it ?</i>


<i>+ What is the main part of the letter ?</i>
<i>+ Was Hoa good at Math ?</i>


<i>+ What subjects wass Hoa good at ?</i>
+Where is she going to celebrate the
Lunar New year Festival ?


<b>2- While-writing</b>


- Ask Ss to write a letter (individually)
- Let Ss correct mistakes eachother.



10


- Answer the questions (in El or
Vietnamese)


- Look at the letter (P.51) and listen
to the T


- Write down.


- Look at Hoa's letter to Tim.
Identify the sections.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(73)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=73>

- Ask Ss to read their letter in front of
the class


- Give suggested writing (on
extra-board)


<b>3- Post-writing</b>


- Ask Ss to read their letter in front of
the class.


18


10


- Imagine that you are Lan and write


a letter to her penpal Donna in San
Francisco using the given
information.


- Read the letter aloud.
Suggested answer:


<i>Tuyen Quang, November 1st<sub>, 2008. </sub></i>
<i>Dear Donna,</i>


<i>Thanks for your letter. I’m</i>
<i>glad to hear that you had an</i>
<i>interesting/ enjoyable Mother’sDay.</i>
<i>We received our second semester</i>
<i>report last month. I got good grades</i>
<i>for Geography, Physics and Math</i>
<i>but my English and History results</i>
<i>were poor. My teacher advised me to</i>
<i>improve English and History. I think</i>
<i>I have to study harder next school</i>
<i>year.</i>


<i>In a few weeks, we are going</i>
<i>to celebrate the mid-Autumn festival.</i>
<i>That is an Autumn moon festival in</i>
<i>Vietnam. This afternoon, I’m going</i>
<i>to Ha Long Bay with my aunt and</i>
<i>uncle by bus and I’m going to stay</i>
<i>there with them untill the festival</i>
<i>comes. I’ll send you a postcard from</i>


<i>there.</i>


<i>Write soon and tell me all</i>
<i>your news.</i>


<i>Best.</i>
<i>Lan</i>


- Read aloud in front of the class.
<b>4. Consolidation: 2’</b>


- T reminds Ss to remember form of a letter..
<b>5. Homework: 1’</b>


<b>- T asks Ss to write a letter to a friend to tell about their own studying.</b>


Week 12 <sub>Date of planning</sub> <sub>2/11/09</sub>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(74)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=74>

Class 8A
<b>Unit 5: </b> study habits <i><b>(Cont…)</b></i>


Language focus 2,3,4
<b>A.The aims and requests.</b>


<b>1. Objectives. </b>


- By the end of the lesson Ss review structures and vocabulary of unit 5.
<b>2.Teaching points</b>


+ Adverbs of manner


+ Modal: <i>Should</i>


<i>+ </i>Commands, requests and advice in reported speech.
+ Vocabulary: review


- Ss' knowledge, doing exercises.
<b>3. Preparation</b>


<b>+</b><i>Teacher</i>: Text book, work book, extra-board...


<b>+</b><i>Students</i>: Text book, work book, school things, extra-board ....


<b>B. Procedures.</b>
<b>1. Organization: 1’</b>


+Good morning!How are you today?Who’s absent today?
<b>2. Checking up/Warm up:</b>


<b>3. New lesson:</b>


T’ activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1- Modal "Should":</b>


- Repeat the uses of "<i>should</i>" for
advices


- Conduct Ss to do exercise 2 (P.52)
- Call Ss to give their sentences in
front of the class.



<b>2- Reported speech</b>


- Repeat forms of commands,
requests and advice in reported
speech.


6


16


- Work in pairs to complete the
dialogue, use the


- Repeat the uses of "should" for
advices.


- Work in pairs to say what Mr.Hao
should do.


- Practice in front of the class.
* The rights As are:


<i>- Mr.Hao should paint the house.</i>
<i>- Mr.Hao should cut the glass.</i>
<i>- Mr.Hao should replant the trees.</i>
<i>- Mr.Hao should mend the door.</i>


- Repeat, copy ...



+ Changing pronouns, reflexive pronouns,
possessive pronouns.


<b>Direct</b> <b>Indirect</b>


Ng«i thø nhÊt Ng«i thø ba
Ng«i thø hai


Cùng ngơi với tân
ngữ của mệnh đề
chính


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(75)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=75>

- Ask Ss to do exercise 3 (P.53)


- Correct Ss' answers


* Conduct Ss to do exercise 4 (P.53)
at home


(process as exercise 3 above)


8


6


+ Changing tense of verbs.


<b>Direct</b> <b>Indirect</b>


Simple



present Simple past
Present Pro... Past Pro...


Future Future in the past
Note: Reported commands


<b>S + asked + O + to + V-infi...</b>


* Work in pairs to report Miss
Jackson's commands, ...


EX:


<i>Miss Jackson said: "Can you give</i>
<i>Tim this dictionary ?"</i>


<i>You: Miss Jackson asked me to give</i>
<i>you this dictionary.</i>


- Practice in front of the class.
* The right As are:


<i>a) Miss Jackson asked me to wait</i>
<i>outside her office.</i>


<i>b) Miss Jackson told me to give you</i>
<i>your…</i>


<i>c) Miss Jackson told me to help you</i>


<i>with your Spanish …</i>


<i>d) Miss Jackson asked me to meet her</i>
<i>next week.</i>


- Work in pairs to report Miss Jackson'
s advice:


(process as exercise 3 above)


* The right As are:


<i>a) Miss Jackson said you should</i>
<i>spend more time on …</i>


<i>b) Miss Jackson said you should</i>
<i>practice speaking …</i>


<i>c) Miss Jackson said you should listen</i>
<i>to Spanish …</i>


<i>d) Miss Jackson said you should</i>
<i>practice reading …</i>


<i>e) Miss Jackson said you should use</i>
<i>this dictionary to find …</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(76)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=76>

- T reminsds Ss to remember grammar structures, that they have reviewed.
<b>5. Home work: 1’</b>



- Ask Ss to do the exercises again, and copy them into note-book.


Week 13 <sub>Date of planning</sub> <sub>2/11/09</sub>


Period 34 <sub>Date of teaching</sub> <sub>10/11/09</sub>


Class 8A


Unit 6: the youth pioneers club


Getting Started - Listen and Read
<b>A.The aims and requests.</b>


<b>1. Objectives. </b>


- By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to know about obligations of a youth
pioneer.


<b>2.Teaching points</b>


+ Structure: <i>Like / love / enjoy / hate + gerund (V-ing)</i>


+ Vocabulary: <i>help elderly, blind people, outdoor activities ....</i>


- Ss train communicatve skill.
<b>3. Preparation</b>


+<i>Teacher</i>: Text book, work book, picture, tape and cassette player, extra-board....
+<i>Students</i>: Text book, work book, school things, ....



<b>B. Procedures.</b>
<b>1. Organization: 1’</b>


+Good morning!How are you today?Who’s absent today?
<b>2. Checking up/Warm up: (5-7’)</b>


T’ activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1- Warm-up</b>
- Make quetions


<i>+ What do you usually do on your</i>
<i>summer holiday ?</i>


<i>+ Are you members of the Young</i>
<i>Pioneers and Youth Organization ?</i>
<i>+ Do you take part in them ?</i>


+ What activity do you like most ?


5 - Discuss and answer the questions
Ss' answers may be:


<i>+ We usually take part in (music lub)</i>
<i>+ Yes, I am</i>


<i>+ Yes, I am</i>


<i>+ I like helping blind people</i>.



<b>3. New lesson:</b>


T’ activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1- Presentation</b>


- Hang the picture on the BB.


- Help Ss to talk about activities that
they don't know.


<b> 8</b>


- Look at the picture, talk about
activities on it.


EX:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(77)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=77>

- Ask: <i>Which activity do you like best</i>
<i>? Why </i>?


- Explain Gerund: V-ing


We use "V-ing" form as a noun called
a gerund: (Dancing is fun)


+ Use after prepositions.


+ Use after some certain verbs:
<i>like/enjoy/ hate/ ...</i>



<b>2- Practice</b>


- Ask Ss to scan the dialogue and
guess


- Play the tape (Listen and read)
twice.


- Explain some new words


<i>+Enroll: đăng ký học/tham gia ...</i>
<i>+Application form: đơn đăng ký</i>
<i>+Fill out: điền thông tin</i>


<i>+Out door activities: HĐ ngoài trời</i>
<i>+Acting: diễn kịch</i>


- Ask Ss to complete Nga's details (on
extra-board)


Name… Date of birth:...
Home address… Sex: ...


Phone number… Interests: ...
- Ask the groups to give their answers
- Give the right answers


- Conduct Ss to practice asking and
answering about Nga's informations.


<i>+ What’s her name ?</i>


<i>+ Where does she live ?</i>


13


<i>+ Helping elderly peopl (giúp đỡ ngời</i>
<i>già)</i>


<i>+ Helping handicapped people (giúp</i>
<i>đỡ trẻ em tàn tật)</i>


<i>+ Cleaning up the neighborhood (quét</i>
<i>đờng làng)</i>


<i>+ Caring for animals (chăm sóc động</i>
<i>vật)</i>


<i>+ Planting trees (trồng cây)</i>


<i>+ Taking part in sports (tham gia các</i>
<i>môn thÓ thao) ....</i>


- Answer the question.


- Listen to the teacher and copy the
forms and usage of gerund


<i><b>Like/love/enjoy/hate + gerund </b></i>
<i><b>(V-ing)</b></i>



- Work in groups: Predict what does
Nga have to do when she enrolls The
Youth Union ?


- Listen to the tape and get what
information does Nga give the
secretary?


- Copy and read:


- Work in groups of 3.


- Check answers
Answer:


Name: <i>Pham Mai Nga</i>


Home address: <i>5 Tran Phu </i>
<i>Street.</i>


Phone number: <i>Not available</i>


Date of birth: <i>April 22 , 1989</i>.
Sex: <i>Female.</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(78)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=78>

<i>+ When was she born ?</i>


<i>+ What are her hobbies</i> ?



<b>3- Further - practice</b>


- Give cued word


a. play soccer / volleyball
b. watch TV / listen to music<i>.</i>


c. read books / do homework<i>.</i>


d. chat with friends / do the
housework.


e. cook meal / decorate the house.


10


- Work in pairs to ask and answer:
Answers may be:


<i>+ Her name' s Nga</i>


<i>+ She lives at 5 Tran Phu Street</i>
<i>+ Apr 22, 1989</i>


<i>+ Drawing, acting</i> ...


- Work in groups to interview their
partners, use the cued words.


Example Exchange:



S1: <i>What are your hobbies ?</i>


S2: <i>I</i> <i>like/love</i> <i>playing</i>


<i>soccer/volleyball</i>.
<b>4. Consolidation: 2’</b>


- Remind Ss to remember acyivities of The Youth Union.


<b>5. Homework: 1’</b>


- T asks Ss to learn new words by heart.


- Ss find out how to ask/respond to favors; offer assistance and respond to
assistance.


Week 13 <sub>Date of planning</sub> <sub>2/11/09</sub>


Period 35 <sub>Date of teaching</sub> <sub>13/11/09</sub>


Class 8A


Unit 6: the youth pioneers club <i><b>(Cont…)</b></i>
Speak +Language 3


<b>A.The aims and requests.</b>
<b>1. Objectives. </b>


- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to ask for favors and respond to


favors, ask for assistaces and respond to assistaces, to listen to an El song


<i>"Children of the world unite"</i> and learn it by heart.
<b>2.Teaching points</b>


- Structure: Favors and assistance:


<i>Can/could you do me a favor, May I hel you ? ...</i>


- Vocabulary: <i>Review</i>


- Ss train speaking and listening skills.
<b>3. Preparation</b>


<b>+</b><i>Teacher</i>: Text book, work book, tape and cassette player, extra-board ...


<b>+</b><i>Students</i>: Text book, work book, school things, ....
<b>B. Procedures.</b>


<b>1. Organization: 1’</b>


+Good morning!How are you today?Who’s absent today?
<b>2. Checking up/Warm up: (5-7’)</b>


T’ activities T Ss’ activities


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(79)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=79>

- Hang the picture on BB then make
some suggested Qs:


<i>+ Could you help me, please ?</i>



<i>+ Can you help me answer this</i>
<i>question ?</i>


<i>+ Could you help me with this</i>


<i>grammar problem </i>?


<i>+ Do you need any help</i> ?




* Work in groups to answer the T's
questions


<i>+ What can I do for you ?</i>
<i>+ Certainly.</i>


<i>+ Of course.</i>
<i>+ Yes, thank you</i>



<b>3. New lesson:</b>


T’ activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1. Speaking</b>


<b>1.1- Pre-speaking:</b>



- Present modal senteces by hanging the
extra board on BB.


<b>* Asking for favors:</b> (đề nghị đợc giúp
đỡ).


<i>+ Can/could you help me, please ?</i>
<i>+ Could you do me a favor ?</i>
<i>+ I need a favor....</i>


(Bạn có thể giúp tơi đợc khơng ?)


<b>* Responding to favor</b>. (đáp lại ...)


<i><b>- Agree</b></i>.


<i>+ Certainly / Of course / Sure / No pro..</i>
<i>+ How can I help you ?</i>


<i><b>- Refuse:</b></i> I am sorry, I am really busy.


<b>* Offering assistance:</b> (đa ra đề nghị)
<i>+ May I help you ?</i>


<i>+ Do you need any help ? ...</i>


<b>* Responding to assistance:</b> (đáp lại)


<i><b>- Agree:</b></i>



<i>+ Yes, thank you.</i>


<i>+ Yes. That's verry kind of you.</i>
<i><b>- Refuse:</b></i>


<i>+ No, thank you.</i>


- Let Ss practice the dialogues (P.52 - 53).
<b>1.2- While-speaking:</b>


- Conduct Ss to make up new conversations.


<b>Who</b> <b>What</b> <b>Why</b>


<i>tourist</i> <i>find ...</i> <i>lost money</i>


<i>neighbor</i> <i>tidying</i>


<i>yard</i>


<i>broken leg</i>


... ... ...


- Call some pairs to practice in front of the
class.


8


14



- Look at the board, listen to the T ' s
explanation, and copy.


* Work in pairs to practice the
dialogues.


a) Mrs Ngoc: ...
Hoa: ...


b) Receptionist: ...
Tourist: ...


* Work in groups to find which
structure did Mrs Ngoc and the
tourist use ? What did they need to
help ?


* Work in pairs to make up new
conversations, use the structures they
have learnt and the situations in the
book.


Ex:


S1: Can you help me, please ?


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(80)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=80>

<b>1.3- Post-speaking:</b>


- Conduct Ss to make new dialogues



- Ask some pairs to practice in front of the
class.


<b>2. Language focus 3</b>


10


S1: Can you tell me the way to the
nearest police station ?


S2: Sure. You go ..., it' s on ....


S1: Thank you very much. That's very
kind of you.


...


* Work in pairs, think of a situation
and make up a new dialogue using the
structures to ask for and respond to
favors.


<b>4. Consolidation 2’</b>


- T ask Ss to repeat and remember how to ask for favors and respond to favors, ask
for assistaces and respond to assistaces


<b>5. Homework: 1’</b>



- T asks Ss to make sentences, use the structures that they ' ve learned.
- T asks Ss to learn by heart the song.


Week 13 <sub>Date of planning</sub> <sub>2/11/09</sub>


Period 36 <sub>Date of teaching</sub> <sub>12/11/09</sub>


Class 8A


Unit 6: the youth pioneers club <i><b>(Cont…)</b></i>
<b> Listen+ Language 1</b>


<b>A.The aims and requests.</b>
<b>1. Objectives. </b>


- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to ask for favors and respond to
favors, ask for assistaces and respond to assistaces, to listen to an El song


<i>"Children of the world unite"</i> and learn it by heart.
<b>2.Teaching points</b>


- Structure: Favors and assistance:


<i>Can/could you do me a favor, May I hel you ? ...</i>


- Vocabulary: <i>Review</i>


- Ss train speaking and listening skills.
<b>3. Preparation</b>



<b>+</b><i>Teacher</i>: Text book, work book, tape and cassette player, extra-board ...


<b>+</b><i>Students</i>: Text book, work book, school things, ....
<b>B. Procedures.</b>


<b>1. Organization: 1’</b>


+Good morning!How are you today?Who’s absent today?
<b>2. Checking up: </b>


<b>3. New lesson:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(81)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=81>

<b>1.1- Pre-listening:</b>


- Hang the extra board (open song) on BB


- Conduct Ss to read the words again and
predict missing words.


- Ask Ss to give their predictions. (write
down them on BB).


<b>1.2- While-listening:</b>


- Ask Ss to prepare to listen to the tape and
complete the song.


- Play the tape (three times)
- Ask Ss to give their answers.



- Play the tape again and correct mistekes.


- Play the tape again (three time)
<b>1.3- Post-listening:</b>


- Devide the class into four groups to make
copeition.


(Play the tape again)


- Ask each group to stand up and sing the
song in front of the class.


<b>2. Language focus 1</b>


6


18


12


- Work in groups to read the
words of the song and tell what
the song is about.


(<i>The song is about children</i>)
- Work in groups to guess the
missing words in the blanks.
- Give predictions in front of the
class.



- Listen to the tape and complete
the song by filling the words in
the blanks


- Check predictions together.
- Give answers.


- Listen to the tape again and
check.


Answers:


(1) unite (2) peace (3) right
(4) love (5) north (6) south
(7) of (8) world (9) show
(10)


place


(11) out (12)
stand
(13)


world


- Sing follow the tape in chorus
- Work in groups to pratice
singing the song (listen to the
tape)



- The groups sing.


(which group sing well and
correctly, that will win the race.


<b>4. Consolidation: 2’</b>


- T ask Ss to repeat and remember how to ask for favors and respond to favors, ask
for assistaces and respond to assistaces


<b>5. Home work: 1’</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(82)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=82>

- T asks Ss to learn by heart the song.


Week 13 <sub>Date of planning</sub> <sub>2/11/09</sub>


Period 37 <sub>Date of teaching</sub> <sub>17/11/09</sub>


Class 8A


Unit 6: the youth pioneers club <i><b>(Cont…)</b></i>
read


<b>A.The aims and requests.</b>
<b>1. Objectives.</b>


- By the end of the lesson Ss will understand more about "Boy Scouts of America"
and "Girl Guides Association" ...



<b>2.Teaching points</b>
+ Structure: Review


+ Vocabulary: <i>Encourage good, personal fitness, Voluntary youth organization,</i>
<i>Coeducational, ...</i>


- Ss train reading skill.
<b>3. Preparation</b>


<b>+</b><i>Teacher:</i> Text book, work book, tape and cassette player ...


<b>+</b><i>Students:</i> Text book, work book, school things, ....
<b>B. Procedures.</b>


<b>1. Organization: 1’</b>


+Good morning!How are you today?Who’s absent today?
<b>2. Checking up/Warm up: (5-7’)</b>


T’ activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1. Checking up</b>


- T asks the class to sing the song


<i>"Children of the world unite"</i> .
<b>2. Warm up</b>


- Hold the class do <i><b>Jumbled words</b></i>:



3


4 - <i><b>Jumbled words</b></i>:


<i>racchtaer</i>
<i>Iojn</i>
<i>mai</i>
<i>pexailn</i>
<i>nessmsibuan</i>
<i>thauolgh</i>


<i>- character</i>
<i>- join</i>
<i>- aim</i>
<i>- explain</i>
<i>- businessman</i>
<i>- although</i>


<b>3. New lesson:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(83)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=83>

<b>1. Reading</b>
<b>1.1- Pre-reading</b>


- Ask Ss to tell what they know about
<i>Boy Scouts of America and Girl</i>
<i>Guides Association.</i>


- Present new words


<i>+Build character: XD nhân cách</i>


<i>+Encourage good citizenship: khuyến</i>
<i>khích các công dân có ích</i>


<i>+Personal fitness: sở thích cá nhân.</i>
<i>+Coeducational: GD chung cho nam</i>
<i>và nữ</i>


<i>Voluntary youth organiation: T/c</i>
<i>thanh niªn TN.</i>


- Play the tape (Read)


<b>1.2- While-reading</b>


- Ask Ss to scan the text and tell
history of <i>Boy Scouts of America and</i>
<i>Girl Guides Association.</i>


- Conduct Ss to do exercise 1.


- Ask Ss to give As.
- Give the right As.


- Hold Ss to ask in answer in pairs.
- Ask some pairs to do in front of the
class.


- Correct Ss' answers and give the
right As.



The right As:


<i>a. Scouting began in England in</i>
<i>1907.</i>


<i>b. The meeting between a boy scout</i>
<i>and Mr William Boyce led to the</i>
<i>Scouts Association crossing the</i>
<i>Atlantic in 1910.</i>


<i>c. Girls can join in the Girls Guides</i>


10


14


- Work in groups to sum up and tell in
front of the class.


- Copy new words:


- Read words in chorus and the
individually.


- Listen to the tape and tell what the
text discusses.


- Work in small groups to find out.
(Ss' answers)



- Fill in the missing dates.


<b>Dates</b> <b>Events</b>


a) the beginning of the Scout
Association


b) William Boyce was introduced
to scouting


c) the founding of Girl Guides
Association and Camp Fire Boys
and Girls.


d) over five million scouts in th
BSA


- Read answers in front of the class.
Answers:


<i>a) 1907 b) 1909 c) 1910 d) 1994</i>
- Work in pairs to ask and answer
about these associations.


Ex:


S1: When did scouting begin in
England?


S2: Scouting begin in England in 1907.



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(84)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=84>

<i>Association and Camp Fire Boy and</i>
<i>Girls.</i>


<i>d. They are builing characters, good</i>
<i>citizenship and personal fitness</i>.
<b>1.3- Post-reading</b>


- Ask some better Ss to read the text
and translate it into Vietnamese.
Note:


<i>+Businessman: thơng gia</i>
<i>+Lead to: dẫn n</i>


<i>+Worldwide: khắp thế giới.</i>
<i>+Differ: khác biệt</i>


10
<b>4. Consolidation 2</b>


- T reminds Ss to remember history of <i>theBoy Scouts of America and Girl Guides</i>
<i>Association.</i>


<b>5. Home work: 1’</b>


- Ss write informations about <i>the</i> <i>Boy Scouts of America and Girl Guides</i>
<i>Association.</i>


Week 14 <sub>Date of planning</sub> <sub>2/11/09</sub>



Period 38 <sub>Date of teaching</sub> <sub>19/11/09</sub>


Class 8A


Unit 6: the youth pioneers club <i><b>(Cont…)</b></i>
write


<b>A.The aims and requests.</b>
<b>1. Objectives. </b>


- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to write a letter about a future plan using


<i>“be going to</i>” and know more about act... of The HCM Communist Youth
Union ...


<b>2.Teaching points</b>


+ Structure: <i>"Be going to"</i>


+ Vocabulary: <i>recycling programs, collect glass, paper, cans, save natural</i>
<i>resources, ...</i>


- Ss train writing skill.
<b>3. Preparation</b>


<b>+</b><i>Teacher:</i> Text book, work book, ...


<b>+</b><i>Students:</i> Text book, work book, school things, ....
<b>B. Procedures.</b>



<b>1. Organization: (1)</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(85)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=85>

<b>2.Checking up: (5-7</b>’)


T’ activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1.Warm – up</b>


- Hold the class to do "<i><b>Noughts and</b></i>
<i><b>Crosses</b></i>".


5


- Play about words of the last lesson.
Organization Citizenship Businessman
Youth Association Program


Century Member Volunteer


<b>3. New lesson: </b>


T’ activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1.Writing</b>


<b>1.1- Pre-writing</b>


- Ask Ss to read the notice (P.58) and
make a list of activities, that the Y & Y is


going to do.


- Present some words and phrases.


<i>+Help the community: Giúp đỡ cng</i>
<i>ng</i>


<i>+Encourage: Khuyến khích</i>
<i>+Participate: tham gia</i>


<i>+Recycling program: chơng trình tái chế</i>
<i>+Collect glass: thu gom thuỷ tinh</i>


<i>+Save natural resources: bảo vƯ TNTN</i>
<i>+Raise fund for the poor: g©y q cho</i>
<i>ngêi nghÌo</i>


<i>+Help the street children: giúp đỡ trẻ em</i>
<i>đờng phố</i>


<i>+Register: đăng ký.</i>


- Ask Ss to complete Nga's letter to Linh
about Y & Y plan by filling the missing
information in the blank.


- Ask the groups to read their completed
letter in front of the class.


<b>1.2- While-writing</b>


- Make questions:


<i>+ Why does Hoa look happy ?</i>


<i>+ What is she going to do in the</i>
<i>environment month ?</i>


- Conduct Ss to imagine that they are
Hoa and write a letter to their parents


10


- Work in groups to read the notice
and make a list of activities, that
the Y & Y is going to do.


EX: <i>Collecting used glass</i> ...


- Read words in chorus and
individually


- Work in small groups to filling
the missing information in the
blank.


- One represents for the group to
read letter, (other listen then
correct)


* Answers will be:


(1) community
(2) recycling
(3) collect
(4) send
(5) recycling


(6) save
(7) raise


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(86)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=86>

about the activities they are going to do.


- Go around the class to help Ss words or
phrases.


<b>1.3- Post-writing</b>


- Choose 4 letters to correct in front of
the class.


- Give suggested answers (on
extra-board)


15


6


aunt, then answer the T' s
questions.


Ss' s may be:



<i>+ Because she' s going to join the</i>
<i>Y & Y Green Group.</i>


<i>+ ... clean the lakes' banks, plant</i>
<i>trees</i> ...


* Work individually to write a
letter.


EX:


<i>Dear Mom and Dad.</i>


<i>I' m very happy to tell you that I' m</i>
<i>going to join the Y & Y Green</i>
<i>Group of my school</i>...


- Suggested answers:


<i>Dear Mom and Dad,</i>


<i>I'm very happy to tell you thats I'm</i>
<i>able to join the Y & Y Green</i>
<i>Group of my school.</i>


<i>The green group is holding</i> <i>an</i>


<i>environment month plan. We are</i> ...



4. Consolidation: (2)


- T reminds Ss to remember some activities of The HCM Communist Youth Union.
<b>5. Home work: (1)</b>


- T asks Ss to write a letter to a friend to tell about their last summer activities.


Week 14 <sub>Date of planning</sub> <sub>2/11/09</sub>


Period 39 <sub>Date of teaching</sub> <sub>24/11/09</sub>


Class 8A


<b>Review</b>
<b>A.The aims and requests.</b>


<b>1. Objectives. </b>


- By the end of the lesson Ss review structures and vocabulary from unit 4 to unit
6, and prepar for the 2nd<sub> test. </sub>


<b>2.Teaching points</b>
+ Past simple tense
+ Used to + V-infi...
+ Adverbs of manner
+ Rreported speech.
+ Gerunds


+ Modals ....



+ Vocabulary: review


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(87)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=87>

<b>3. Preparation</b>


<b>+</b><i>Teacher:</i> Text book, work book, ...


<b>+</b><i>Students:</i> Text book, work book, school things,....


<b>B. Procedures.</b>
<b>1. Organization: (1)</b>


+Good morning!How are you today?Who’s absent today?
<b>2. Checking up/Warm up: </b>


<b>3. New lesson:</b>


T’ activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1- Past simple</b>


- Ask Ss to repeat forms of verbs in
the past.


- Conduct Ss to do exercise, that is
about past simple tense.


- Ask some pairs to practice in front
of the class.


<b>2- Prepositions of time:</b>



- Repeat the uses of some
prepositions of time.


- Listen to the T and copy.
<i>In + year (in 2007)</i>


<i>In + month (in August)</i>
<i>On + date (on 17)</i>


<i>On + date, month, year (on June 2,</i>
<i>2005)</i>


<i>On + day (on Monday)</i>
<i>At + time (at 5 am)</i>


<b>3- Used to:</b>


- Conduct Ss to do exercise 3 (P.44)
at home


- Repeat and ask Ss to repeat forms
and uses of "used to".


(+) S + used to + V-inf
(-) S + didn't use to + V-infi


<i>"Used to" diÔn t¶ khãi quen thờng</i>
<i>làm trong quá khứ. </i>



- Conduct Ss to do exercise 4 (P.45)
5


6


- Repeat: (V-ed, irregular verbs)
EX: work  worked


run  ran


* Work in pairs to do exercise 2 (P.44)
<i><b>Complete the dialogue. Use the past</b></i>
<i><b>simple</b></i>.


- Ss' answers may be:


a) Lan: Did you eat rice for breakfast ?
Nga: No, I ate noodles


b) Ba: How did you get to school ?
Nam: I took a bus to school


c) Minh: Where were you last night ?
Hoa: I was at home.


d) Chi: Which subject did you have
yesterday ?


Ba: I had Literature.



- Do exercise 3 (P.44) at home<i><b>:</b></i>
<i><b>Complete the sentences. Use the</b></i>
<i><b>prepositions in the table</b></i>.


- Do exercise 4 (P.45) at home:
Complete the dialogues. Use "used to"
and the verbs given.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(88)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=88>

at home


<b>4- Reported speech:</b>


- Repeat forms of commands,
requests and advice in reported
speech.


+ Changing pronouns, reflexive pronouns,
possessive pronouns.


<b>Direct</b> <b>Indirect</b>


Ng«i thø nhÊt Ng«i thø ba


Ngơi thứ hai Cùng ngôi với tân ngữ của mệnh đề
chớnh


Ngôi thứ ba Giữ nguyên


+ Changing tense of verbs.



<b>Direct</b> <b>Indirect</b>


Simple


present Simple past
Present Pro... Past Pro...


Future Future in the past
Note: Reported commands


<b>S + asked + O + to + V-infi...</b>
- Ask Ss to do exercise 3 (P.53)
<b>5- Gerunds:</b>


- Explain the form and usage of
gerunds


Form: <i><b>Verb-ing</b></i>.
Usage:


+ After prepositions.


+ After some expressions: (can't
<i>stand, a waste of, ....)</i>


+ After some certain verbs: (love,
<i>continue, ...)</i>


- Hold Ss to do exercise 2 (P.61)
<b>6- Modals: "</b><i><b>may, can, could</b></i><b> "</b>



- Conduct Ss to do exercise 3 (61-62)
- Ask some pairs to practice in front
of the class.


5


10


10


* Work in pairs to report Miss
Jackson's commands, ...


EX:


<i>Miss Jackson said: "Can you give Tim</i>
<i>this dictionary ?"</i>


<i>You: Miss Jackson asked me to give</i>
<i>you this dictionary.</i>


- Listen and copy


* Work in pairs to talk about your
friends' hobbies. (look at the table)
EX:


A: Ba loves playing soccer, but he
<i>doesn't like washing up.</i>



B: Lan doesn't like playing soccer ...


- Work in pairs to complete the
dialogues.


EX:


A. Woman: Can / Could you help me,
<i>please ?</i>


Man: Yes, certainly.


Woman: Can you buy a ticket for me ?


<b>4. Consolidation: (2)</b>


- T reminsds Ss to remember grammar structures, that they have reviewed.
<b>5. Home work: (1)</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(89)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=89>

Week 15 <sub>Date of planning</sub> <sub>21/11/09</sub>


Period 40 <sub>Date of teaching</sub> <sub>26/11/09</sub>


Class 8A


<b>The 2nd<sub> written Test </sub></b>


<b>Time: 45 minutes</b>
<b>A.The aims and requests.</b>



<b>1. Objectives. </b>


- By the end of the test students will know
<b>2.Teaching points</b>


<b>3. Preparation</b>


<b>+</b><i>Teacher:</i> Test 45’


<b>+</b><i> Students</i>: review first at home
<b>B. Procedures.</b>


<b>1. Organization:</b>
<b>2. Checking up: </b>


<b>3. New lesson (test 45’)</b>
Matrix:


<b>Unit</b>
<b>(Topic)</b>
<b>Content</b>


<b>s</b>


<b>Requirement</b>


<b>Total</b>


<b>Realize</b> <b><sub>thoroughly</sub>Grasp</b> <b>Apply</b>



<b>Object</b> <b>Subject Object</b> <b>Subjec<sub>t</sub></b> <b>Object Subject</b>


Listening 8 <i><sub>(2)</sub></i> <b>8</b> <i><b><sub>(2)</sub></b></i>


Reading 8 <i><sub>(2)</sub></i> <b>8</b> <i><b><sub>(2)</sub></b></i>


Writing 6 <i><sub>(3)</sub></i> <b>6</b> <i><b><sub>(3)</sub></b></i>


Gramma
r


6


<i>(1,5)</i>


<b>6</b>


<i><b>(1,5)</b></i>


Voca... 6 <i><sub>(1,5)</sub></i> <b>6</b> <i><b><sub>(1,5)</sub></b></i>


<b>Total</b> <b>14</b> <i><b><sub>(3,5)</sub></b></i> <b>14</b> <i><b><sub>(3,5)</sub></b></i> <b>6</b> <i><b><sub>(3)</sub></b></i> <b>34</b> <i><b><sub>(10)</sub></b></i>


<b>Questions </b>


<b>I- Listen to Nam talking about his sister and himself, then tick () if the</b>
<b>sentences are True or False. </b><i><b>(2 points)</b></i>


<b>T</b> <b> F</b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(90)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=90>

2. Nam has a brother c c


3. Nam goes to school in the morning. c c


4. Nga is 14 years old c c


5. Last year Nam and his sister used to play soocer c c


6. Now they usually play chess. c c


7. Nga goes to school in the afternoon. c c


8. Nga likes watching cartoon on TV c c


<b>II- Read the following letter. </b><i><b>(2 points)</b></i>
Dear Nam.


Last weekend, I went on a trip to Ha Long Bay. We went with some students in my
class. I got up at five o'clock on Sunday and met other students, and then we had
bread and milk for breakfast. In the morning we visited the Dau Go cave, it was very
interesting. We had lunch in a little cafe and drank a lot of orange-juice. In the
afternoon, we went to Tuan Chau Island. It' s wonderful. We took a lot of photographs
there.


<i>Love</i>


<i> Nguyen Ngoc Hung</i>


<b>* Tick () T (true) or F (false). </b>



<b>T </b> <b>F</b>


1. Hung went to Ha Long last weekend c c
2. He went with his mother and father c c
3. Hung and his friends had noodles for breakfast c c


4. They had lunch in a little cafe. c c
5. They didn't take any photographs there. c c


6. They went to Tuan Chau Island in the afternoon c c


7. On that day Hung got up at six o'clock. c c


8. They visited the Dau Go cave in the morning. c c


<b>III. Underline the best word to complete the folowing sentences: (1,5 points)</b>


1. Last year I (use to / used to / use) ... get up late.


2. Nga's grandma (did / didn't / don't)... use to go to school.
3. My brother usually (go / goes / went)... to work by motorbike..
4. Do you like (watch / watching / watched) ...T.V ?


5. Can you (help / to help / helping) ... me carry my bags ?
6. Mrs Huong asked me (give / to give/ gave) ... you this book.


<b>IV- Choose the best option A, B, C or D to complete the following sentences.</b>
<i><b>(1,5 points)</b></i>



1. Alexander G.Bell was born ... Marth 3, 1847.


a. in b. on c. at d. from


2. On Saturday night I usually go to bed ... 9 o'clock.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(91)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=91>

3. I often do my homework ... dinner.


a. on b. in c. from d. after


4. ... Sunday. I went to see my grandmother.


a. Next b. Last c. To d. Now


5. Mrs Dung is ... at music.


a. well b. better c. good d. worse


6. Little Pea had to do the ... all day after her father got married again.


a. shoe b. Math c. homework d. housework


<b>V- Write to complete sentences from the following sets of words and phrases.</b>
<i><b>(3 points)</b></i>


1. We are / interested in/ collect / stamps.


...
2. Lan / be / good / English.



...
3. Hoa / spends / free time / doing volunteer work.


...
4. I / usually / go to school / 6 o'clock.


...
5. I / usually / listen / music / Sunday.


...
6. I / need / improve / to / speaking skill / my.


...
<b>Answers</b>


<b>I. Listen: </b><i><b>(2 points)</b></i>


<i><b>Tape Transcript:</b></i> (T reads 3 times)


Hello ! my name is Nam. I am 13 years old. I live with my father, mother and a
sister Nga, she is 16 years old, she is a student. Every day I go to school in the
morning, but my sister goes to school in the afternoon. Last year we used to play soccer
in the afternoon but now we usually play badminton. I like watching cartoon on TV,
but my sister doesn't like, she usually does her homework.


1- T 2-F 3- T 4- F 5- T 6- F 7- T 8- F
<b>II. Read. </b><i><b>(2 points)</b></i>


<b>* True or alse: </b><i>(1,5 points)</i>



1- T 2- F 3- F 4- T


5- F 6- T 7- F 8- T


<b>III. Underline ... </b><i><b>(1,5 points)</b></i>


1. used to 2. didn't 3. goes
4. watching 5. help 6. to give
<b>IV. Choose ... </b><i><b>(1,5 points)</b></i>


<b>Sen..</b> 1 2 3 4 5 6


<b>Ans..</b> b a d b c d


<b>V. Write... </b><i><b>(3 points)</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(92)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=92>

3. Hoa spends her free time on doing volunteer work.
4. I usually go to school at 6 o'clock.


5. I usually listen to music on Sunday.
6. I need to improve my speaking skill .
<b>4. Consolidation: </b>


-T collects Ss' tests.
<b>5. Homework: </b>


-Ask Ss to do preparations for the next lesson.


Week 15 <sub>Date of planning</sub> <sub>21/11/09</sub>



Period 41 <sub>Date of teaching</sub> <sub>27/11/09</sub>


Class 8A


<b>Unit 7: my neighborhood</b>


getting started - listen and read
<b>A.The aims and requests.</b>


<b>1. Objectives. </b>


- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know more about Na’s new neighbor.
<b>2.Teaching points</b>


+ Structure: <i>The present perfect tense with "have been"</i>


+ Vocabulary: <i>(review)</i>


- Ss train communicatve skill.
<b>3. Preparation</b>


<b>+</b><i> Teacher</i>: Text book, work book, tape and cassette player,....


<b>+ </b><i>Students</i>: Text book, work book, school things, ....
<b>B. Procedures.</b>


<b>1. Organization:1’</b>


+Good morning!How are you today?Who’s absent today?
<b>2. Checking up/Warm up: (5-7</b>’)



T’ activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1.Warm-up:</b>


- Hold the class to play "Networks"
- Review some places by making
questions:


+ Is there a ... in your
neighborhood ?


6


- Play "Network" about names of places
in a neighborhood.


...


Market Bank


... ...


<i>Hospiatl ; hotel ; grocery store ;</i>
<i>hairdresser's ; drugstore ; stadium;</i>


<i>aswimming-pool</i> ...


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(93)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=93>

<b>3. New lesson:</b>



T’ activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1- Presentation:</b>


- Ask Ss to look at the picture (P.63)
and match the names with the
pictures


<i>a. grocery</i> <i> b. stadium</i>
<i>c. wet market d. drug store</i>
<i>e. hairdresser s</i>’ <i> f. swimming </i>
<i>pool.</i>


- Make some suggested questions


<i>+ Who is new to the</i>
<i>neighborhood ?</i>


<i>+ Does Nam live in the</i>
<i>neighborhood ?</i>


<i>+ What is around the corner on the</i>
<i>neiborhood ?</i>


<i>+ Is the food good ?</i>


- Play the tape (dialogue between
Nam and Na)


- Present new words:



<i>+Close by: gần đây</i>


<i>+Pancakes: bánh bột mì, trứng, bơ</i>
<i>rán</i>


<i>+Delicious: ngon.</i>


- Present new grammar structures:
<b>* The present perfect tense.</b>
<b>- Forms:</b>


<i><b>(+) S + have / has + P</b><b>II</b><b> + O</b></i>


<i><b>(-) S + have not (haven't / has not</b></i>
<i><b>(hasn't) + P</b><b>II</b><b> + O.</b></i>


<i><b>(?) Have / Has + S + P</b><b>II</b><b> + O ? </b></i>


<i><b>-Yes, S + have / has (No, S +</b></i>
<i><b>haven't / hasn't</b></i>).


<b>- Usage</b>: Thì HTHT diễn tả hành
động bắt đầu trong quá khứ còn liên
quan đến hiện tại hoặc đang xảy ra
ở hiện tại. Thì HTHT thờng đi với
"since" và "for".


"<i><b>Since</b></i>" + (a point of time)
"<i><b>For</b></i>" + (a period of time)


- Make examples ...


- Explain PII - Past participle (V-ed)
- Make examples:


<i>+ We have lived here for about 9</i>
<i>years</i>.


....


<b>3- Practice:</b>


- Let Ss practice the dialogue.


20


- Match the names of places found in a
neighborhood with the pictures.


* Work in small groups to predict
answers.


<i>+ Na or (Nam) ?</i>
<i>+ Yes, he is. (No, ...)</i>
<i>+ A restaurant.</i>
<i>+ Yes, it is (No, ...)</i>


- Listen to the tape and answer the T' s
questions.



- Copy and read new words.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(94)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=94>

- Ask Ss to give their answers.


<b>4- Production:</b>


- Conduct Ss to practice talking
around their neighbord, use the
present perfect tense.


6


8


* Work in pairs to read the dialogue and
complete the sentences a) to f) (P.64)
Answer key:


<i>a) new ; b) last week ; c) tired ;</i>
<i>d) restaurant ; e) Hue ; f)</i>


<i>pancakes</i>.


- Work in group to make sentences;


EX: <i>We have learnt EL for 3 years</i>.


<b>4. Consolidation: 2’</b>


- Remind Ss to remember the present perfect tense with "since" and "for".


- Coduct Ss to pronounce past participle of irregular verbs.


<b>5. Homework: 1’</b>


- Ss read past participle of irregular verbs.


- Ss make sentences, use the present perfect tense with "<i>since</i>" and "<i>for</i>".


Week 16 <sub>Date of planning</sub> <sub>27/11/09</sub>


Period 42 <sub>Date of teaching</sub> <sub>30/11/09</sub>


Class 8A


<b>Unit 7: my neighborhood (Cont )</b>…
Speak


<b>A.The aims and requests.</b>
<b>1. Objectives. </b>


By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to talk about how to send a parcel or
letters. And know what Na is going to do on the weekend by listening.


<b>2.Teaching points</b>


- Structure: (<i>Review)</i> <i>How much ...? ...</i>


- Vocabulary: <i>parcel, airmail, surface mail, charge, Town ground, El speaking</i>
<i>contest, Cultural house ... ...</i>



- Ss train speaking skill.
<b>3. Preparation</b>


<b>+ </b><i>Teacher:</i> Text book, work book, tape and cassette player, a letter ...
<b>+ </b><i>Students</i>: Text book, work book, school things, ....


<b>B. Procedures.</b>
<b>1. Organization: 1’</b>


+Good morning!How are you today?Who’s absent today?
<b>2. Checking up/Warm up: (5-7’)</b>


T’ activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1.Checking up</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(95)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=95>

perfect tense with "<i>since</i>" and "<i>for</i>".
<b>2- Warm up:</b>


- Show a letter in front of the class and
make some questions:


<i>+ What is this ? </i>


<i>+ Where can I post it ?</i>
<i>+ How can I post it ?</i>
<i>+ How much is it ?</i>


<i>+ Have you ever sent a letter or a </i>
<i>parcel ?</i>



5 * Work in groups to look at the T
and answer the questions:


<i>(a letter)</i>


<i>(at the post office) </i>
<i>(stick a stamp on it) </i>
<i>(800 dong) </i>


<i>(Yes, I have</i>)
<b>3. New lesson:</b>


T’ activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1- Pre-Speaking:</b>
- Make questions:
a, Where are they ?
b, What are they doing ?
- Present new words:


<i>+Parcel: bu phÈm</i>


<i>+Airmail: th, bu phÈm (gưi b»ng</i>
<i>kh«ng)</i>


<i>+Surface mail: th, bu phÈm (gưi b»ng</i>
<i>bé)</i>


<i>+Charge: cíc phÝ</i>


<i>+Item: VËt phÈm</i>


- Let the class practice the dialogue
(P.64-65) in pairs.


<b>2- While-speaking:</b>


- Conduct Ss to make similar
dialogues


- Ask some pairs to practice in front
of the class.


<b>3- Post-speaking:</b>
- Hold the class practice


8


15


8


- Look at the picture (P.64) and
answer the t' s questions.


(They are at the post office)
(Sending ...)


- Copy and read new words in chorus
and individually.



* Work in pairs to practice the
dialogue between Mrs Kim and Clerk.
* Work in pairs and make similar
dialogues by using the brochures and
information in exercise 2.


Example:


<i>A: Good morning. What can I do for</i>
<i>you ?</i>


<i>B: I want to send this postcard to</i>
<i>HCM city.</i>


<i>A: Do you want to send it airmail or</i>
<i>surface mail ?</i>


<i>B: I don't know. How much is surface</i>
<i>mail ?</i>


<i>A: It' s 800 dong.</i>


<i>B: What about airmail ?</i>
<i>A: Airmail is ...</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(96)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=96>

dialogues in different places such as:


<i>market, shop</i> ...
<b>4. Consolidation(3’)</b>



- Ss answer coprehension questions:


<i>a. Does Mrs Kim send the parcel air mail or surface mail ? Why ?</i>
<i>b. What is the weight of her parcel ?</i>


<i>c. How much does she pay ?</i>


<b>5. Home work(1’)</b>


- T asks Ss to learn the dialogue by heart.


Week 16 <sub>Date of planning</sub> <sub>29/11/09</sub>


Period 43 <sub>Date of teaching</sub> <sub>1/12/09</sub>


Class 8A


<b>Unit 7: my neighborhood (Cont )</b>…
Listen+ LANGUAGE FOCUS 5
<b>A.The aims and requests.</b>


<b>1. Objectives. </b>


By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to talk about how to send a parcel or
letters. And know what Na is going to do on the weekend by listening.


<b>2.Teaching points</b>


- Structure: (<i>Review)</i> <i>How much ...? ...</i>



- Vocabulary: <i>parcel, airmail, surface mail, charge, Town ground, El speaking</i>
<i>contest, Cultural house ... ...</i>


- Ss train speaking skill.
<b>3. Preparation</b>


<b>+</b><i>Teacher:</i> Text book, work book, tape and cassette player, a letter ...
<b>+</b><i>Students</i>: Text book, work book, school things, ....


<b>B. Procedures.</b>
<b>1. Organization: 1’</b>


Good morning!How are you today?
Who’s absent today?


<b>2. Checking up/Warm up: (5-7’)</b>


T’ activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1.Checking up </b>


- Call on 2 Ss to repeat the present
perfect tense with "<i>since</i>" and "<i>for</i>".


5


<b>3. New lesson:</b>


T’ activities T Ss’ activities



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(97)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=97>

- Ask Ss to look at part 1 (P.65)
- Explain meaning of the phrases.
<i>Town ground: Sân VĐ thành phố</i>
<i>El Speaking Contest: Cuộc thi nói T.A</i>
<i>The New Comer: Ngời mới đến.</i>
<i>Cultural House: Nhà văn hoá.</i>


- Ask Ss to look at 4 advertisements of
“What’s on this week ?” and guess the
Ss to guess what is in the blanks 2 3
-4.


- Explain the advertisements


<i>Millennium Cinema: Rạp chiếu phim</i>
<i>Thiên niên kỷ.</i>


<i>Vs = versus: Đấu với</i>


<i>Young photographers: NhiÕp ¶nh tre.</i>


- Conduct Ss to listen


<b>2- While-listening:</b>


- Play the tape (listen P.65-66) (twice)
- Ask Ss to give answers


- Give the right answers


Right answers:


1<i>. The new comer</i>


<i>2. Town Ground</i>
<i>3. El speaking contest</i>
<i>4. Cultural House</i>.


- Let the class to predict the
statements


- Coducts Ss to listen to the tape again
and decide whether the statements are
True or False or No information.
- Play the tape


- Ask Ss to give their answers


- Play the tape again and give the right
answers


<b>3- Post-listening:</b>


10


17


- Look at book.


- Listento the T and copy



* Work in groups to look at 4
advertisements of “ What’ s on this
week ?” and predict what is in the
blanks 2 - 3 - 4.


- Look at the advertisements, and
copy


- Prepare to listen to the tape
between Na anf Nam and fill in the
blanks with the suitable place or
program.


- Listen to the tape and do exercise.
- Give answers


* Work in groups to read the
statements (part 2) and predict them
are True or False or No information
- Listen to the tape again and decide
whether the statements are True or
False or No information. Correct the
false ones.


- Listen to the tape and do exercise.
- Ss give answers:


- Copy the right As:



<i>a) True b) False c) False</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(98)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=98>

- Give comprehension questions:


<i>a. Does Na like movies ?</i>


<i>b. Why won’t she go to see the film</i>
<i>“The new comer.” ?</i>


<i>c. Why won’t she go to the photo</i>
<i>exhibition ?</i>


<i>d. Who will go to the soccer match ?</i>
<i>e. What time does the match start ?</i>


10


<i>information</i>


- Answer the qestions.


<i>a, Yes / No ...</i>


<i>b, She' s seen that film.</i>


<i>c, She will go to the El speaking </i>
<i>contest.</i>


<i>d, Nam, Ba and Minh</i>
<i>e, It starts at 4 pm</i>.


<b>4. Consolidation 2’</b>


- Ss answer coprehension questions:


<i>a. Does Mrs Kim send the parcel air mail or surface mail ? Why ?</i>
<i>b. What is the weight of her parcel ?</i>


<i>c. How much does she pay ?</i>


<b>5. Home work 1’</b>


- T asks Ss to learn the dialogue by heart.


<b>Week</b> <b>16</b> <sub>Date of planning</sub> <sub>29/11/09</sub>


<b>Period</b> <b>44</b> <sub>Date of teaching</sub> <sub>3/12/09</sub>


Class 8A


<b>Correcting the 2nd<sub> Test</sub></b>


<b>Time: 45 minutes</b>
<b>A.The aims and requests.</b>


<b>1. Objectives. </b>


- Help Ss check their result of the test. By the end of the lesson Ss will know what
they need to improve in the future.


<b>2.Teaching points</b>



-Listen to the text about Nam, then check T or F. Read Hung' s letter to Nam, then
check T or F and answer the questions. Past simple, present simple, gerund, used
to, prepositions.... Vocabulary from Unit 4 top Unit 6. Write sentences with words
given.


- Ss check their skills on listening, reading and writing by doing exercises.
<b>3. Preparation</b>


<b>+</b><i>Teacher:</i> Teaching plan, questions and answers....


<b>+</b><i>Students:</i> School things,....
<b>B. Procedures.</b>


<b>1. Organization: 1’</b>


+Good morning!How are you today?Who’s absent today?
<b>2. Checking up/Warm up: (5-7’)</b>


T’ activities T Ss’ activities


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(99)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=99>

- T ask Ss to give their opinions on the 2nd
test.


<b>3. New lesson:</b>


T’ activities T Ss’ activities


- Give paper of the test to Ss (if the T has
finished marking)



- Read the text about Nam (three times).
- Ask Ss to give their As


- Correct Ss' As and then give the right As.


- Let Ss work in groups to read the letter
and check the sentences.


- Explain words or phrases that Ss don't
remember.


- Correct Ss' answers and give the right As.


- Explain the forms and uses of tenses again.


- Ask Ss to give their As.


- Explain structures that Ss don't remember.
10


10


6


6


<b>I- Listen and decide True or</b>
<b>False sentences. </b>



- Listen to the T and tick T or F.
- Give answers.


- Check and copy the right As:
1- T 2-F 3- T 4- F
5- T 6- F 7- T 8- F
<b>II- Read the passage then</b>
<b>check () the box. </b>


- Work in groups to read the
letter and do exercise.


- Give answers.
- Check and copy:


1- T 2- F 3- F
4- T 5- F 6- T
7- F 8- T


<b>III. Underline the best word</b>
<b>to complete the sentences. </b>
- Process as exercise II above.
Answers:


1. used to 2. didn't 3.
goes 4. watching 5. help
6. to give


<b>IV- Choose the best option A,</b>
<b>B, C or D. </b>



- Give answers in front of the
class.


Answer key:


<b>Sen..</b> 1 2 3 4 5 6


<b>Ans..</b> b a d b c d


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(100)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=100>

- Repeat the cues:


1. We / interested / collect / stamps.
2. Lan / be / good / English.


3. Hoa / spend / free time / doing volunteer
work.


4. I / usually / go to school / 6 o'clock.
5. I / usually / listen / music / Sunday.


6. I / need / improve / to / speaking skill /
my.


6


1. We are interested in
collecting stamps.


2. Lan is good at English.



3. Hoa spends her free time on
doing volunteer work.


4. I usually go to school at 6
o'clock.


5. I usually listen to music on
Sunday.


6. I need to improve my
speaking skill.


<b>4. Consolidation: 2’</b>


- T ask Ss to repeat some grammar structures that are used in the test.


<b>5. Homework: 1’</b>


- Ss do exercises again
- Prepare the next lesson.


Week 16 <sub>Date of planning</sub> <sub>1/12/09</sub>


Period 45 <sub>Date of teaching</sub> <sub>4/12/09</sub>


Class 8A


<b>Unit 7: my neighborhood (Cont )</b>…
reading



<b>A.The aims and requests.</b>
<b>1. Objectives.</b>


- By the end of the lesson Ss will know about information of a central commerce.
<b>2.Teaching points</b>


+ Structure: Review the present perfect tense


+ Vocabulary: <i>shopping mall, wide selection of products, to concern ...</i>


- Ss train reading coprehension skill.
<b>3. Preparation</b>


<b>+</b><i>Teacher:</i> Text book, work book, tape and cassette player, extra-board ...


<b>+</b><i> Students:</i> Text book, work book, school things, ....
<b>B. Procedures.</b>


<b>1. Organization: 1’</b>


+Good morning!How are you today?Who’s absent today?
<b>2.Checking up/Warm up: (5-7’)</b>


T’ activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1.Warm up:</b>


- Hold the class to do guessing words:
<i>A place where you can buy everything.</i>


<i>A place where you can buy vegetables</i>
<i>and fruits.</i>


6


- Guessing the words:
<i>(supermarket)</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(101)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=101>

<i>A place where you can buy book.</i>


A place where you can come to see the


movies. <i>(Book store)</i>(movie theater)


<b>3. New lesson:</b>


T’ activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1- Pre-reading</b>:


- Make some suggested questions:
<i>+ What do you know about the text</i>
<i>by reading the advertisement ?</i>


<i>+ What can we do in the shopping</i>
<i>mall ?</i>


...


- Explain the advertisement.


Shopping mall: TT thơng mại


Everything under one roof: Tất cả dới
<i>1 mái che</i>


50 air-conditioned specialty stores:
<i>Gian hàng đ/b đợc trang bị máy lạnh</i>
Children' s play area: Khu vui chơi
<i>cho tr</i>


Special discounts during the first two
weeks: Giảm giá đ/b trong 2 tuần
Open daily: Mở cửa hàng ngày


<b>2- While-reading</b>:


- Play the tape (once)


- Ask Ss to read the text and the
advertisement then do exercise


- Ask some Ss to give their answers
in front of the class. (Extra-board)
- Give the right answers.


a) F. (Seven days a week)


b) F. (There are 50 stores in the mall)
c) F. (Not everyone is pleased
about ...)



d) T.
e) T.


- Explain some new words and
phrases.


<i>Convenient: tiện lợi</i>


<i>Take one' s business: lấy đi cơ hội</i>
<i>làm ¨n cđa ai ®ã.</i>


<i>A wider selection of ...: sù lùa chän</i>
<i>phong phó vỊ</i> ...


....


8


12


- Look at the advertisement (P.67) and
answer the questions.


+ (Shopping mall)
+ ...


- Look at the advertisement, listen to
the T, and copy:



- Listen to the tape (look at book)
* Work in small groups to read the
text and the dvertisement then decide
whether the statements are true or
false. (Correct the false ones).


- Change answers with others.
- Give answers in front of the class.
- Check and copy the right answers.


- Copy and read:


* Work in groups to ask and answer:
Example: (a)


S1 : <i>What is special about the new</i>
<i>shopping mall ?</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(102)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=102>

- Ask Ss to practice asking and
answering questions a) - d)


Answer key:


<i>b) In the shopping mall, there are 50</i>
<i>air-conditioned specialty stores, 4</i>
<i>movie theaters and 10 restaurants;</i>
<i>there is also a children' s play are.</i>
<i>c) They think the new shopping mall</i>
<i>will take their business.</i>



<i>d) The stores in mall will offer a</i>
<i>wider selection of products, some</i>


<i>kinds of goods are at cheaper prices</i>.


<b>3- Post-reading</b>:


- Ask Ss to read the text and
translate it into Vietnamese.


- Ask some to do in front of the class.


10


<i>present shopping are. All the shops</i>
<i>are under one roof. That will be very</i>
<i>convenient, specailly during the hot</i>
<i>and humid summer months,</i> .... <i>the</i>
<i>weather</i>.


- Work in groups to read and translate
the text into Vietnamese.


- Some Ss do in front of the class.
<b>4. Consolidation: 2’</b>


-T reminds content of the text and the advertisement
<b>5. Homework: 1’</b>


- Prepare for writing.



Week 17 <sub>Date of planning</sub> <sub>1/12/09</sub>


Period 46 <sub>Date of teaching</sub> <sub>7/12/09</sub>


Class 8A


<b>Unit 7: my neighborhood (Cont )</b>…
write


<b>A.The aims and requests.</b>
<b>1. Objectives. </b>


- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to write a notice in English and to use
some adjectives to make comparisons.


<b>2.Teaching points</b>


+ Structure: <i>A notice in El</i>


+ Vocabulary:<i>Residents, store owners, effects, hardware ...</i>


- Ss train writing skill.
<b>3. Preparation</b>


<b>+ </b><i>Teacher</i>: Text book, work book, ...


<b>+ </b><i>Students</i>: Text book, work book, school things, ....
<b>B. Procedures.</b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(103)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=103>

+Good morning!How are you today?Who’s absent today?
<b>2. Checking up/Warm up: (5-7’)</b>


T’ activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1. Checking up</b>


- Ask 1 or 2 Ss to retell about the shopping
mall we leraned last period.


5


<b>3. New lesson:</b>


T’ activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1- Pre-writing:</b>


- Make questions about the shopping
mall in last period:


<i>a, Besides its effects, does it bring about</i>
<i>any negative ones ?</i>


<i>b, What are they ?</i>


- Introduce: (Store owners oganize a
<i>meting to discuss the effcts of the new</i>
<i>shopping mall)</i>



- Explain new words and phrases:
<i>+Residents: dân c</i>


<i>+Sstore owners:chủ cửa hàng</i>
<i>+Effects: ảnh hëng </i>


<i>+Hardware: kim khÝ</i>


- Let Ss read the notice and tell how
many parts are there in a notice.


- Explain:


<i>A notice usually includes: (Topic, time,</i>
<i>place, participants ...)</i>


- Let Ss read the notice (P.86)


<b>2- While-writing</b>:


- Ask Ss to write a similar notice for the
El Speaking Club about the El Speaking
Contest.


Key:


<i><b>The school El Speaking Club</b></i>.
Holding a speaking contest to celebrate


the teachers' day.


Date: <i>November 15</i>


Time: <i>7.30 pm to 10.00 pm</i>


Place: <i>Hall 204, Building G</i>


<i>Please contact Tran Thi Thu Hang of </i>
<i>class 8H at the above address for more</i>
<i>information</i>.


- Get Ss to share writing with their
partners.


10


24


- Work in pairs to answer:
....


- Look at the book (P.68) and liten
to the T


- Read and copy new words:
- Work in groups.


Answers may be:


<i>Chủ đề, thời gian, địa điểm, thành</i>
<i>phần ..</i>



- Listen to the T and compare with
the notice on book.


- Read


- Write a similar notice for the El
Speaking Club about the El
Speaking Contest.


EX:


<i><b>The school El Speaking Club</b></i>.
Holding a speaking contest to


celebrate the teachers' day.
Date: ...


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(104)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=104>

<b>3- Post-writing:</b>


- Divide the class into 4 groups and
conduct Ss to use above notices as
examples and write a notice for a class
meeting, a picnic, a sport club ...


- Ask the groups to read their writings


out. 12


- Check writing with partners.


- Work in groups to write a notice
for a class meeting, a picnic, a
sport club ...


(One group writes about one topic)
- Each group has 1 or 2, who read
writing in front of the class.


<b>4. Consolidation: 2’</b>


- T reminds Ss to remember form of a notice in El
<b>5. Home work: 1’</b>


<b>- T asks Ss to write 2 notice.</b>


Week 17 <sub>Date of planning</sub> <sub>1/12/09</sub>


Period 47 <sub>Date of teaching</sub> <sub>8/12/09</sub>


Class 8A


<b>REVISION</b>
<b>A.The aims and requests.</b>


<b>1. Objectives. </b>


- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to use the Present perfect with <i>for</i> and


<i>since</i>. Comparison with like; (not) as …… as, (not) the same as, different from.



<b>2.Teaching points</b>
+ Structure:


S + have/ has + V-PII + O.


(not) as ………. as, (not) the same as, different from.
+ Vocabulary: <i>Review ...</i>


- Ss train communicative skill and do exercises..
<b>3. Preparation</b>


<b>+ </b><i>Teacher:</i> Text book, work book, extra-boards...


<b>+ </b><i>Students:</i> Text book, work book, school things, ....
<b>B. Procedures.</b>


<b>1. Organization: 1’</b>


+Good morning!How are you today?Who’s absent today?
<b>2.Checking up/Warm up: (5-7</b>’)


T’ activities T Ss’ activities


<b>.1- Warm up:</b>


- Hold the class to play <i><b>Jumbled words</b></i>:
- fftcee = effect


- usssid = discuss
- nattco = contact



5


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(105)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=105>

- oldh = hold
- btleeecra = celebrate
<b>3. New lesson:</b>


T’ activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1- Present perfect tense:</b>


- Repeat the forms and uses of the
tense:


* Forms:


<i><b>S + have/ has + Past participle + O</b></i>
- I/ You/ We/ They + have


- She/ He/ It/ + has.
* Using:


- To talk about something which started
in the past and continues up to the
present.


- We often use “<i>For</i>” and “<i>Since</i>” with
the present perfect tense.


<i>For + a period of time</i>.



<i>Since + a point of time</i>.
<b>2 - Comparision: </b>


- Hold the class to review comparision
S1 + be + (not) the same as + S2
S1 + be + different from + S2
S1 + be + (not) as +adj + as + S2
<b>3- Exercises:</b>


<b>3.1. Match the verb to its past </b>
<b>participle:</b>


- Hang the extra-board and call on 2 Ss
to do the exercise.


- Correct their mistake if have and give
keys.


<b>3.2. Complete the expression. Use</b>
<b>"</b><i><b>for</b></i><b>" or "</b><i><b>since</b></i><b>".</b>


- Call some Ss to give their answers.
- Correct and give the keys.


<b>3.3. Complete the sentences, use the</b>
<b>present perfect tense:</b>


- Give the extra-board., ask Ss to do the
exercise.



10


8


4


4


5


- Review and copy


- Make examples:
Eg:


- <i>I have learned English for 6 years.</i>
<i>- She has done her homework since</i>


<i>Monday</i>.


- Review, write into note book and
then make examples:


Ex:


<i>- Nam's bag is the same as Nga's </i>
<i>bag.</i>


<i>- He is different from his brother.</i>


<i>- I am not as tall as you</i>.


- Work individually to match…


<i>be - been; go - gone; eat - eaten; live</i>
<i>- lived; attend - attended; see - seen;</i>
<i>write written; work worked; do </i>
<i>done; write written; work </i>
<i>-worked; collect - collected</i>.


- Work individually to complete the
expression. Use "<i>for</i>" or "<i>since</i>".
- Give answers in front of the class
* The right As are;


<i>For </i>five minute <i>Since</i> January


<i>Since</i> 1990 <i>Since</i> the


summer


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(106)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=106>

- Call some Ss to do the exercise in
front of the class.


- Correct their mistakes and give keys.
* The right answers are:


a, haven't eaten b, haven't seen
c, have attended d, has worked
e, has collected.



<b>3.4. Complete the conversation…</b>
- Ask Ss to work in pairs to complete
the dialogues.


- Call some pairs to practice the
dialogue in front of the class.


- Correct their mistakes and give keys.


<i>(1) have been; (2) hope ; (3) have … </i>
<i>lived</i>


<i>(4) Is ; (5) want ; (6) looks ; (7) Have </i>


<i>… been ; (8) have seen</i>.


6


<i>Since</i> Friday <i>For</i> 20 years.


- Work in small groups to give the
correct form of verbs.


- Work in pairs to complete the
dialogues.


- Practice in front of the class
- Check answers:



<b>4. Consolidation: 2’</b>


- T reminds Ss to remember form and use of the present perfect tense, and comparision.
<b>5. Home work: 1’</b>


- T asks Ss to do exercise 5 on page 70 (text book)


Week 17 <sub>Date of planning</sub> <sub>1/12/09</sub>


Period 48 <sub>Date of teaching</sub> <sub>10/12/09</sub>


Class 8A


<b>Unit 8: country life and city life</b>


getting started + listen and read+LANGUAGE FOCUS 4
<b>A.The aims and requests.</b>


<b>1. Objectives. </b>


- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to practice more about country life and
city life.


<b>2.Teaching points</b>


+ Structure: <i>Review the present perfect tense </i>


+ Vocabulary: <i>about: entertainment, traffic jam, pollution ...</i>


- Ss train communicatve skill and separate voca ....


<b>3. Preparation</b>


<b>1 </b><i>Teacher:</i> Text book, work book, picture, tape and cassette player,....
<b>2 </b><i>Students:</i> Text book, work book, school things, ....


<b>B. Procedures.</b>
<b>1. Organization: 1’</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(107)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=107>

T’ activities T Ss’ activities
<b>1.Checking up</b>


- One student repeats the uses and forms
of the present perfect tense. (aloud in
front of the class).


<b>2.Warm-up:</b>


- Hold the class to do "matching"
<i>Be</i>
<i>Eee </i>
<i>Collect </i>
<i>Go </i>
<i>Eat </i>
<i>Write</i>
<i>Work</i>
<i>Live</i>
<i>Worked </i>
<i>Lived </i>
<i>Seen </i>
<i>Been </i>


<i>Written </i>
<i>Eaten </i>
<i>Collected </i>
<i>Gone</i>
3


4 - Ss do "matching"


<i>Be</i>
<i>Eee </i>
<i>Collect </i>
<i>Go </i>
<i>Eat </i>
<i>Write</i>
<i>Work</i>
<i>Live</i>
<i>Worked </i>
<i>Lived </i>
<i>Seen </i>
<i>Been </i>
<i>Written </i>
<i>Eaten </i>
<i>Collected </i>
<i>Gone</i>


<b>3. New lesson:</b>


T’ activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1- Presentation:</b>



- Hang the picture on BB


- Ask the class to make two list of
things in the city and things in the
country.


- Sum up


2- Practice:


- Ask Ss to look at the dialogue
between Hoa and Na.


- Play the tape (twice)


- Explain meaning if new words:


<i>+Relative: họ hàng</i>


<i>+Permanently: lâu dài, mÃi mÃi</i>


<i>+Medical facilities: cơ sở vật chÊt cho</i>
<i>ý tÕ</i>


<i>+Accessible: (có thể) tiếp cận đợc</i>
<i>+Change for the better: thay đổi theo</i>
<i>chiều hớng tốt. </i>


- Play the tape again (once)



- Let the class answer the questions
8


12


- Look at the picture. Work in groups
to make two list of things in the city
and things in the country (the group
with the longest list will be the
winner.)


Ss' answers may be:


<b>Country</b> <b>City</b>


Fresh air Noisy


Quiet Pollution


Harvest Crowded


Friendly Sport activities


Boring Kinds of goods


... ....


- Look at the dialogue, listen to the
tape and find new words



- Show new words.
- Read and copy


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(108)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=108>

(Part 2).


- Ask some pairs to ask and answer in
front of the class.


Ss' answers may be:


<i>a) Na has been to the countryside.</i>
<i>b) She was there for one day.</i>


<i>c) The countryside is peaceful and</i>
<i>quiet and there is nothing to do.</i>


<i>d) There are no entertainments.</i>


<i>e) Many remote areas are getting</i>
<i>electricity. People can now have things</i>
<i>like refrigerators anf TV, and medical</i>
<i>facilities are more accessible.</i>


<i>f) (Students' answers</i>)
<b>3- Further-Practice:</b>
- Divide the class 2 groups


- Explain: <i>(Both city life and country</i>
<i>life have advantaes and disadvantages.</i>


<i>Wherever you live, the most important</i>
<i>thing is to kep our environment clean,</i>
<i>to be friendly, to others, to help the</i>
<i>surroundings</i> ...)


10


- Work in pairs to practice the
dialogue .


- Work in small groups to ask and
answer.


- In each group has 2 small groups
(Members of one write sentences
about what they like and others write
sentences about what they dislike in
the city/ countryside).


- The groups compare sentences
eachother. (what they like in the city /
countryside)


- Listen to the T
<b>4. Consolidation: 2’</b>


- Remind Ss to remember advantages and disadvantages of living in the country
and the city.


<b>5. Homework: 1’</b>



- Ask Ss to write words and phrases about countyside and city.


Week 18 <sub>Date of planning</sub> <sub>1/12/09</sub>


Period 49 <sub>Date of teaching</sub> <sub>11/12/09</sub>


Class 8A


<b>Unit 8: country life and city life (Cont )</b>…
Speak + LANGUAGE FOCUS 3, 5.
<b>A.The aims and requests.</b>


<b>1. Objectives. </b>


- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to practice speaking about the changes of
a place, and revise some communications on phone.


<b>2.Teaching points</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(109)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=109>

- Vocabulary: (<i>Review)</i>


- Ss train speaking and listening skills.
<b>3. Preparation</b>


<b>+ </b><i>Teacher</i>: Text book, work book, picture,tape and cassette player...


<b>+ </b><i>Students</i>: Text book, work book, school things, ....
<b>B. Procedures.</b>



<b>1. Organization: 1’</b>


+Good morning!How are you today?Who’s absent today?
<b>2. Checking up/Warm up: (5-7’)</b>


T’ activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1.Checking up</b>


- Ss answer: <i><b>Do you prefer the city or </b></i>
<i><b>countryside ? Why</b></i> ?


<b>2.Warm up:</b>


-Hold the class to play "Networks"


<i>Tall buildings Green trees</i>


2


5 Words about city and countryside
- Look at the pictures and tell what
do you like in 2 pictures:


<b>3. New lesson:</b>


T’ activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1- Pre-speaking:</b>



- Hang the picture on BB, ask Ss to look
at the picture.


<b>Picture 1</b> <b>Picture 2</b>


<i>Small houses</i> <i>High building</i>


<i>Bikes</i> <i>Motorbikes, cars </i>


... ....


- Explain: (What you see in the pictures
are the city 5 years ago and now use the
words in the box to talk about the
changes of the city)


<b>2- While-speaking:</b>


- Repeat comparative of short and long
adjectives.


- Ask Ss to talk in front of the class.


7


15


- Listen to the T, look at the
pictures



- Work in pairs , talking about the
changes of the city by coparing 2
pictures.


EX: <i>Traffice is getting busier</i>.
Ss' answers may be:


<i>+ There are more tall biuldings</i>
<i>and houses.</i>


<i>+ The town is becoming more</i>
<i>beautiful.</i>


<i>+ The houses are getting more</i>
<i>modern.</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(110)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=110>

<b>3- Post-speaking: </b>


- Conduct Ss to talk about the changes in
their home village.


- Help Ss words and phrases if necesary 10


<i>+ There are more green trees.</i>
<i>+ The street are becoming</i>
<i>cleaner / longer</i> ..


- Work in groups to talk, use the
present progressivetense ...



EX: <i>There are more motorbikes,</i>
<i>cars</i> ...


- Some volunteers talk in front of
the class.


<b>4. Consolidation: 2’</b>


- Remind Ss to remember words and phrases about the changes in the past and
now.


<b>5. Home work: 1’</b>


- Ask Ss to write some sentences, using the present progressive tense to descibe the changes in
their school.


Week 18 <sub>Date of planning</sub> <sub>10/12/09</sub>


Period 50 <sub>Date of teaching</sub> <sub>14/12/09</sub>


Class 8A


<b>Unit 8: country life and city life (Cont )</b>…
LISTEN+LANGUAGE FOCUS 1, 2.
<b>A.The aims and requests.</b>


<b>1. Objectives. </b>


- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to practice speaking about the changes of
a place, and revise some communications on phone.



<b>2.Teaching points</b>


- Structure: <i>Review comparative</i>


- Vocabulary: (<i>Review)</i>


- Ss train speaking and listening skills.
<b>3. Preparation</b>


<b>+ </b><i>Teacher</i>: Text book, work book, picture,tape and cassette player...


<b>+ </b><i>Students</i>: Text book, work book, school things, ....
<b>B. Procedures.</b>


<b>1. Organization: 1’</b>


+Good morning!How are you today?Who’s absent today?
<b>2. Checking up/Warm up: </b>


<b>3. New lesson:</b>


T’ activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1- Pre-listening</b>:


- Make some suggested questions:
<i>+ What are they doing ?</i>


<i>+ Can you guess what they are talking</i>


<i>about ?</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(111)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=111>

- Ask Ss to scan the dialogue and predict
the mising words.


- Write Ss' predictions on BB.


<b>2- While-listening</b>
- Play the tape (3 times)


- Ask Ss to give their answers.


- Play the tape again, and give the right
answers.


Right answers:


<i>(1) that (2) this (3) It' s </i>
<i>(4) Where (5) from (6) coming </i>
<i>(7) week (8) arriving (9) Thursday </i>
<i>(10) late (11) afternoon (12) speak </i>
<i>(13) my (14) get</i>


<b>3- Post-listening:</b>


- Let the class practice the dialogue in
pairs.


- If possible, ask Ss to make similar
dialogues.



18


10
....


- Scan the dialogue between Aunt
Hang and Lan. There are some
mising information. Guess the
missing words.


Ss' predictions:


- Listen to the tape and fill in the
mising words.


- Check the predictions.


- Check and copy the right answers
into notebook


- Practice the dialogue.
EX:


A: <i>Hello. 027 832 987</i>


B: <i>Hello. Is this ....</i> ?
<b>4. Consolidation: 2’</b>


- Sum up the content of the esson


<b>5. Home work: 1’</b>


- Prepare for new lesson


Week 18 <sub>Date of planning</sub> <sub>10/12/09</sub>


Period 51 <sub>Date of teaching</sub> <sub>15/12/09</sub>


Class 8A


Unit 8: country life and city life (Cont )…
reading


<b>A.The aims and requests.</b>
<b>1. Objectives.</b>


- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to understand the text about one of the
social problems such as migration to cities..


<b>2.Teaching points</b>
+ Structure: <i>Review</i>


+ Vocabulary:<i>rural, urban, strain, typhoon, drought, struggle, migrant, increase</i>...
- Ss train reading skill.


<b>3. Preparation</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(112)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=112>

<b>+</b><i>Students</i>: Text book, work book, school things, ....
<b>B. Procedures.</b>



<b>1. Organization: 1’</b>


+Good morning!How are you today?Who’s absent today?
<b>2. Checking up/Warm up: (5-7’)</b>


T’ activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1. Checking up</b>


- T asks Ss to tell changes in their
village.


<b>2.Warm up</b>


- Hold the class to play
"<i><b>Brainstorming</b></i>"


- Sum up Ss' s ideas


3


4


- Work in groups to play
"<i><b>Brainstorming</b></i>" about the most
urgent problems in the city or
country (in Vietnamese)


<b>3. New lesson:</b>



T’ activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1- Pre-reading:</b>


- Introduce: (one of the most pressing
<i>issues in big cities is the overcrowding.</i>
<i>And this mainly results from the</i>
<i>migration of the people from rural</i>
<i>areas to the city.)</i>


- Sum up Ss' ideas, and presenting new
words:


+Rural- thuộc nông thôn
<i>+Urban- Thuộc đô thị</i>
<i>+Strain- sự quá tảt</i>
<i>+Typhoon- trạn bão lớn</i>
<i>+Drought- hạn hán</i>
<i>+Struggle- đấu tranh</i>
<i>+Migrant- dân di c</i>
<i>+Increase- tăng</i>
<i>+Flood - lũ lụt</i>


<b>2- While-reading:</b>
- Play the tape (twice)


- Make some suggested questions:


<i>a. Are many people going to the city ?</i>
<i>b. What do farmers often do when they</i>


<i>need more money ?</i>


<i>c. What happens to the families whose</i>
<i>parents go and live in the city ?</i>


- Conducts Ss to do exercise 1 (P.75)
(Hepl Ss getting meanings of words
and phrases)


- Ask Ss to give answers.


8


14


- Listen to the T, then discuss the
causes of this problem (in


Vietnamese)


- Read and copy new words:


- Listen to the tape (look at book)
- Answer the questions:


<i>(Yes, ...)</i>


<i>(They look for other work)</i>


<i>(Family members have to live apart)</i>


- Work in goups to complete the
summary on P.75, use the
information from the text.


- Give answers


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(113)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=113>

- Give right answers:


<i>1. leaving</i> <i> 2. home</i> <i> 3. city</i>
<i>4. rural </i> <i> 5. city</i> <i> 6. problems</i>
<i>7. schools</i> <i> 8. hospitals</i>


<i>9. problem 10. world </i>


- Ask Ss to read the text again and do
exercise 2 (P.75)


- Explain:


<i>+Great presure: ¸p lùc lín</i>


<i>+Terrible event: sù kiƯn khđng khiÕp</i>
- Correct and give the right ones:
<i>a) rural</i> <i>b) plentiful c) increase</i>
d) strain e) tragedy f) urban


<b>3- Post-reading:</b>


<i><b>- Hold the class to play </b></i>"Rub out and
remember"





Well-paying Plentiful Unpleassant


Typhool Drought Flood


Destroy Face Create


8


- Work in groups to read the text
again and find word.


- Give answers, explain which
informations to give meanings.


- Check and copy


- Take part in the game:


<b>4. Consolidation: 2’</b>


- T reminds Ss to remember words and phrases of the text.
<b>5. Home work: 1’</b>


- Ss write 5 things that the government should do for the rural areas.


Week 18 <sub>Date of planning</sub> <sub>10/12/09</sub>



Period 52 <sub>Date of teaching</sub> <sub>17/12/09</sub>


Class 8A


Unit 8: country life and city life (Cont )…
writing


<b>A.The aims and requests.</b>
<b>1. Objectives. </b>


- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to write letters to their friends about their
neighborhood.


<b>2.Teaching points</b>


+ Structure: <i>An informal letter</i>


+ Vocabulary:<i>Review</i>


- Ss train writing skill.
<b>3. Preparation</b>


<b>+ </b><i>Teacher</i>: Text book, work book, extra board...


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(114)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=114>

<b>1. Organization: 1’</b>


+Good morning!How are you today?Who’s absent today?
<b>2. Checking up/Warm up: (5-7’)</b>


T’ activities T Ss’ activities



<b>1.Checking up</b>


-T makes question: Imagine you are a Minister
to tell what you will do for farmers ?


Ss answer:


<i>Build streets, theater, </i>
<i>stadium in the country.</i>
<i>Build school, hospitals.</i>
<i>Provide clean water, </i>
<i>electricity, facilities.</i>


<b>2.Warm - up:</b>


- Ask Ss to put the outline for an informal letter
in the correct order written on 6 cards.


- Write on the BB for Ss to remember it easily:


<i><b> 1. Heading:</b></i>


<i>Writer’s address.</i>
<i>Date</i>


<i>Dear....,</i>


<i><b>2. Opening</b>.</i>



<i><b>3. Body of the letter.</b></i>


4. <b>Closing.</b>


3


4


- Work in groups to reorder
parts of a letter.


<b>3. New lesson:</b>


T’ activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1- Pre-writing:</b>


- Give suggested questions:
<i>a. Where do you live ?</i>


<i>b. What does your house look like ?</i>
<i>c. How far is it from your house to ... ?</i>
<i>d. What kinds of facilities are there ... ?</i>


<b>2- While-writing:</b>


- Conduct Ss to write a letter to a friend
about their neighborhood.


- Go around the class to help Ss.



7


14


- Work in groups to discuss
about neighborhood, use the T' s
suggested Qs.


- Some Ss do in front of the
class.


<i>+ I live in a house.</i>


<i>+ My house is small, but it' s</i> ....
- Use the given information and
the informal letter's structure,
write a letter to a friend telling
him or her about neighborhood.
EX:


<i>Dong Tho village.</i>
<i>December 10,2007</i>
<i>Dear Lan,</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(115)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=115>

- Ask some Ss to read their letter aloud in
front of the class.


- Correct Ss' mistakes
<b>3- Post-writing:</b>



- Hang the extra board on BB (That is about
a letter)


<i>Dear Mai</i>,


<i>Thanks you for the letter you send me last</i>
<i>week. I live in a partment in the center of</i>
<i>HN. It' s on the five floor of building in Kim</i>
<i>Lien blocks. It' s small with 3 rooms: a</i>
<i>bedroom, a living room, and a kitchens.</i>
<i>There is many things to do. I often take a</i>
<i>walk or plays soccer there. The thing I like</i>
<i>best is the children' s Palace. I go there</i>
<i>every day to play the piano and sing.</i>
<i>Beside, the Palace also offers other classes</i>
<i>like drawing, martial arts ...</i>


<i>What do you like best in your neighborhood</i>
<i>? Please, write to me. I have to stop now to</i>
<i>go to sing class. I'm looking forward to</i>
<i>hear from you soon.</i>


<i>With best wishes</i>
<i>Yours </i>


<i>Nam </i>


10



<i>parents' room and my room</i>. ....


- Read aloud
- Listen


- Work in groups to read the
letter and find out mistakes.
Answer key:


<i>Thanks </i> <i> Thank</i>


<i>send </i> <i> sent</i>
<i>five </i> <i><sub> fifth</sub></i>


<i>kitchens </i> <i><sub> kitchen</sub></i>


<i>is </i> <i> are</i>


<i>plays </i> <i>play</i>


<i>Beside </i> <i> Besides</i>


<i>sing </i> <i> singing </i>


<i>hear </i> <i> hearing</i>


<b>4. Consolidation: 2’</b>


- T reminds Ss to remember form and content of an informal letter
<b>5. Home work:1’</b>



<b>- T asks Ss to write a letter to a friend to tell about their neighborhood.</b>


Week 19 <sub>Date of planning</sub> <sub>10/12/09</sub>


Period 53 <sub>Date of teaching</sub> <sub>18/12/09</sub>


Class 8A


<b>Period 53: REVISION</b>
<b>A.The aims and requests.</b>


<b>1. Objectives. </b>


- By the end of the lesson, Ss will review the present progressive to talk about the
future, and to show changes with “get” and “become”, to use comparative and
superlative adjectives.Ss will revise the uses and forms of the past simple tense,
"ued to" ... , the simple future tense ...


+ Structure: <i>Affirmative</i>, <i>interrogative, negative, ...</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(116)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=116>

<b>2.Teaching points</b>
+ Structure: <i>Review</i>


+ Vocabulary:<i>Review</i>


- Ss train doing exercises skill.
<b>3. Preparation</b>


<b>+ </b><i>Teacher</i>: Text book, work book, extra board...


<b>+ </b><i>Students:</i> Text book, work book, school things, ....
<b>B. Procedures.</b>


<b>1. Organization: 1’</b>


+Good morning!How are you today?Who’s absent today?
<b>2. Checking up: </b>


<b>3. New lesson:</b>


T’ activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1- Present progressive(To talk about the</b>
future)


<b>Exercise 1: </b>


- Ask Ss to read the dialogues a), b).
- Explain Qs in the present progressive.
- Ask Ss to make similar dialogues, use
the shipping information.


- Ask some pairs to practice in front of the
class.


<b>Exercise 2: </b>


- Let Ss read and complete the dialogues.
- Ask Ss to work in front of the class.
3.1.2- To show changes with “get” and


“become”.


<b>Exercise 3: </b>


- Ask Ss to complete the senyences, use
the verbs and adjectives in the boxes.
- Ask Ss to give their answers


- Read the dialogues
- Listen to the T


- Work in pairs to practice the
dialogues.


- Work in pairs to make similar
dialogues, use the shipping
information.


- Practice in front of the class.
EX:


S1: Is there a boat HCMC at
10.30 ?


S2: Is that Speed of Light ?
S1: That’ s right.


S2: I’m sorry, but it’ s been
delayed.



- Work in pairs to read and
complete the dialogues, use the
verbs in the present progressive
tense.


- Work in front of the class.
Answers:


<i>(1) are doing (2) am not</i>
<i>watching</i>


<i>(3) am going (4) are cleaning</i>
<i>(5) am having </i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(117)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=117>

<b>2- Comparisons:</b>
<b>Exercise 4:</b>


- Ask Ss to repeat the forms of
comparative and superlative.


- Conducts Ss to make comparisons
between the city and the country.


<b>Exercise 5: </b>


- Explains 3 advertisements.
- Conduct Ss to pratice.


- Give suggested As on the extra-board



<b>3- Past simple</b>:


- Repeat and ask Ss to repeat the uses and
forms:


<b>* Form:</b>


(+) S + V-ed (past of irregular verbs) + O
(-) S + didn’t + V-infinitive + O.


(?) Did + S + V-infinitive + O ?
<i>- Examples:</i>


<i>I watched T.V last night.</i>


<i>She went to Ho Chi Minh City last year.</i>
<i>They didn t talk to eachother yesterday.</i>’
<i>Did he tell you about his birthday party ?</i>


<b>* Uses :</b> <i>The past simple tense is used to</i>
<i>express events, that happened and</i>
<i>finished in the past.</i>


- It usually goes with: Yesterday, last
<i>week, last month, last ...., ago ..</i>.


<b>- Note</b>: Irregular verbs:
Run  ran


Take  took


Eat  ate
Come  came


...


<b>4- "Used to" ...</b>:


- Repeat and ask Ss to repeat the uses and
forms:


(+) S + used to + V-inf...
(-) S + didn't use to + V-infi...
(?) Did + S + use to + V-infi... ?


<i>"Used to" is used when we want to talk</i>
<i>about things that happened repeatedly in</i>
<i>the past but don't happen now or have</i>


- Give answers in front of the
class.


Answers:


<i>b) … are getting weak.</i>
<i>c) … is getting dark.</i>
<i>d) … is coming cold.</i>
<i>e) … are getting better.</i>


<i>f) … is becoming cleaner</i>.



- Repeat the forms …


- Work in small groups to make
comparisons between the city and
the country.


EX: The food is more expensive.
- Listen to the T


- Read the examples to speak and
write to compare the house, the
villa and the apartment.


EX:


<i>The house is more expensive than</i>
<i>the apartment.</i>


<i>The apartment is smaller than the</i>
<i>villa.</i>


<i>The house is smaller than the</i>
<i>villa.</i>


…..


- Listen to the T, repeat
- Copy into note- book.


- Work in groups to talk about


what they did last summer
vacation.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(118)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=118>

<i>hanged.</i>


EX: When I was 10 I used to cry at night.
- Ask some Ss to speak in front of the
class.


<b>5- Near future:</b>
- Process as above


* "Be going to":


(+) S + is/am/are going to + V-infi...
(-) S + is/am/are + not going to + V-infi...
(?) Is/Am/Are + S + going to + V-infi... ?
- It is used to talk about intentions.


* "Will / Shall"


(+) S + will + V-infi... + O
(-) S + won’t + V-infi... + O
(?) Will + S + V-infi... + O ?


* - It is used to talk about facts in the
<i>future.</i>


- Examples:



<i>I will go to Hanoi tomorrow.</i>


She won’t come to Sapa this Summer.


<b>6- Present simple tense</b>:


- Repeat and ask Ss to repeat the uses and
forms:


<b>* Form:</b>


(+) I/We/You/They + V-infi... + O
He/She/It + V-s (es) + O


(-) I/We/You/They + donot + V-infi...+ O
He/She/It + does not + V-inf.. + O.
(?) Do + I/We/You/They + V-infi... + O ?
Does + He/She/It + V-infi... + O ?
* Uses:


We use the present simple tense for:
<i>+ The habittual actions.</i>


<i>+ Toughts and feelings</i>


<i>+ Facts and things that are true for a </i>
<i>long time.</i>


<i>+ Repeated actions ...</i>
Examples:



<i>+ She washes her clothes everymorning.</i>
<i>+ Nam doesn’t like sports very much.</i>
<i>+ Do you like watching T.V ?</i>


<b>7- Modals (</b><i><b>May/Could ....</b>: </i>


a) "<i><b>Must / have to</b></i>" are used to say that is
necessary to do someting.


EX: We must / have to do the El test.
b) "<i><b>Ought to"</b></i>: When we talk about


obligation, advice, probability,


responsibility ..


EX: I ought to visit my grandmother more


<i>ate ...., I took ...., I went by</i> ....


- Some Ss talk in front of the class.
- Listen to the T, repeat


- Copy into note- book.


- Work in groups to talk about
what they used to do in the past.
EX: <i>Last year we used to go to</i>
<i>school in the afternoon.</i>



- Ss speak in front of the class


- Listen to the T, repeat
- Copy into note- book.


- Work in groups to talk about
what they are going to do/ will do.
EX: <i>We wre going to go fishing</i>
<i>this afternoon.</i>


- Ss speak in front of the class


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(119)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=119>

<i>often.</i>


c) "Should": expresses a duty, an advice, a
probability...


EX: You should do morning exercises.
d) "<i><b>May</b></i>" is used to talk about possible,
permissions, ...


EX: May I borrow your pen ?


e) "Can / Could" express an ability, to ask
for permission ...


EX: Lan can play guitar.


<b>+ Exercises:</b>



- Ask Ss to do exercise 2 (P.35), 2
(P.52), 3 (P.61) txet book.


<b>8- Present progressive</b>:


- Repeat and ask Ss to repeat the uses and
forms:


<b>* Form:</b>


(+) S + is/am/are + V-ing + O


(?) Is/are/am + S + V-ing + O ?
(-) S + is/am/are + not + V-ing


* Usage: <i>It' s used to express actions are</i>


<i>happening at the time of speaking</i>.


EX:


<i>+ Where are you going now, Mai ?</i>
<i>+ She isn’t studying now.</i>


<i>+ I am listening to the music at the</i>
<i>moment.</i>


- Ask Ss to talk in front of the class



<b>9- Gerund ... : </b>


- Repeat and ask Ss to repeat the uses and
forms:


<b>* Form</b>: <i><b>Verb -ing</b></i>


<b>* Usages:</b> (We use the "-ing" form as a
noun called a gerund)


+ It' s used as an uncountable noun in
general statements.


<i>EX: Dancing is fun</i>


+ It' s used as an uncountable after
prepositions


<i>EX: Try to work without making a noise.</i>
+ It' s used as an uncountable noun after
adj and possessives.


<i>EX: His shouting woke me up.</i>


+ The gerund after (the, this, these, ...)
<i>EX: This writing is hard to read.</i>


+ The gerund followed an object
<i>EX: He' s good at repairing bikes.</i>
+ After some certain verbs:



EX: I love playing soccer


<b>10 - Prepositions of time</b>:<b> </b>
- Process as above


- Give some cues for Ss to practice:


- Copy into note- book.


- Work in groups to talk about
everyday activities.


EX:


<i>- I usually go to school bay bike.</i>


...


- Some Ss talk in front of the class.
- Listen to the T.


- Repeat


- Copy into note- book.
- Make examples


-Do exercises


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(120)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=120>

<i>... Monday.</i> <i> ... 3.00pm</i>



<i>...Sunday, Jan 3rd<sub> ... Easter Mondy</sub></i>
<i>... the morning ... 2007</i>


<i>... Christmas ... the 21st<sub> century</sub></i>


<b>11- Adverbs of manner:</b>
<b>* Form: </b><i><b>Adjective + "</b><b>ly"</b></i>


<b>* Use: </b><i>To tell us how someting happens.</i>
<i>Note: Some adverbs without adding "ly"</i>
<i>such as: early, best, hard, near, late</i> ...


- EX: Thom is a hard student. She
<i>works hard.</i>


<b>12- Present perfect tense with "for"</b>
<b>and "since"</b>:


- Repeat and ask Ss to repeat the uses and
forms:


<b>* Form:</b>


(+) S + have / has + PII + O


<i>(-) S + have not (haven't / has not (hasn't)</i>
<i>+ PII + O.</i>


<i>(?) Have / Has + S + PII + O ? - Yes, S</i>



<i>+ have / has (No, S + haven't / hasn't</i>).
<b>* Usage</b>: The present perfect tense is used
to express the actions, that happened in
the past but they relate to the present.


"<i><b>Since</b></i>" + (a point of time)
"<i><b>For</b></i>" + (a period of time)
- Make examples ...


<i>+ I have taught English here for 9 years.</i>
<i>...</i>


<i>- Give exercises:</i>


<b>13. Complete the expressions. Use</b>
<b>"since" or "for".</b>


<i>.... five minutes ... january</i>
<i>.... 1990 ... the summer</i>
<i>.... three hours ... 10 weeks</i>
<i>.... Friday ... 200 years</i>


<b>2.2- Past participle of irregular verbs..</b>:<b> </b>


- Conduct Ss to read the Past participle of
irregular verbs.


- Ask some Ss to read in front of the class
- Ask Ss to do exercise 3 on P.69 (text


book)


- Work in groups to talk about
what they are doing, and what
their partners are doing


EX:


+ <i>We are learning El.</i>


<i>+ Tuan is writing a letter</i>


- Some Ss talk in front of the class.
- Listen to the T, repeat


- Copy into note- book.
- Make examples


- Work in groups to talk , use the
gerund


EX:


+ <i>We like speaking El.</i>


<i>+ It stops raining .</i>


- Some Ss talk in front of the class.


- Work in groups to list the


prepositons of time they have
learnt.


<i>On / at</i>
<i>On / on</i>
<i>In / in</i>
<i>At / in</i>


- Copy


- Work in groups to talk , use
adverbs of manner.


EX:


- + <i>Nga speaks English well.</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(121)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=121>

- Ask Ss to give their answers in front of
the class.


<b>14- Reported speech:</b>


- Repeat the forms and uses of reported
speech.


+ Changing pronouns, reflexive pronouns,
possessive pronouns.


<b>Direct</b> <b>Indirect</b>



Ng«i thø nhÊt Ng«i thø ba


Ngơi thứ hai Cùng ngơi với tân ngữ <sub>của mệnh đề chính</sub>
Ngơi thứ ba Giữ ngun


+ Changing tense of verbs.


<b>Direct</b> <b>Indirect</b>


Simple


present Simple past
Present Pro... Past Pro...


Future Future in the past
Note: Reported commands


<b>S + asked + O + to + V-infi...</b>
<b>15- Comparison</b>:


- Explain:


<b>*</b><i><b>Like:</b></i> (gièng nhau)


EX: They' rre not twins, but they' re very
<i>like.</i>


<b>*</b><i><b>Not (as + adj / adv + as + S + V) = Not </b></i>
<i><b>so + adj / adv + as + S + V.</b></i>



<b>* ( Not) the same as</b>
<b>* Different from</b>


EX: I can' t run as fast as he can.


- Ask Ss to do exercise 5 (P.70) text book.


- Call Ss to read the sentences aloud in
front of the class.


<b>16- Comparative..:</b>


- Review the forms of coparative :


- Copy into note- book.


- Work in groups to practice, use
the present perfect tense with
"since" and "for".


EX:


+ <i>I haven't seen since last week.</i>
<i>+ Have you ever heard about</i>
<i>him ?</i>


- Some Ss talk in front of the class.
- Do exercises.


Ss' answers:



<i>For / Since</i>
<i>Since / Since</i>
<i>For / For</i>
<i>Since / For</i>


- Look at the board of irregular
verbs, read following the T in
chorus. (twice)


Be  <sub> been</sub>
Go  gone
....


- Read individualy
- Do exercises.
The right answers:


<i>a) have lived</i>
<i>b) haven't eaten</i>
<i>c) haven't seen</i>
<i>d) have attended</i>
<i>e) has worked</i>
<i>f) has collected</i>


- Repeat and copy ...


* Work in pairs to report Miss
Jackson's advice (P.53)



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(122)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=122>

<b>* Form:</b>


<i><b>+ With short adjectives</b></i>:


S + be + adjective-<i><b>er</b></i> + than + O


<i><b>+ With long adjectives:</b></i>


S + be + more + adjective + than + O.
- Examples:


<i>+ Nam is taller than Hoa.</i>


+ This dress is more expensive than that
dress.


<b>17- Superlative : </b>


- Process as above


<b>* Form:</b>


+ With short adjectives:


S + be + the + short adjective-<i><b>est</b></i>.
+ With long adjectives:


S + be + the most + long adjectives.
Note: Execptions



<i>good - better - the best</i>
<i>bad - worse - the worst</i>
<i>little - less - the least</i>
<i>many - more - the most.</i>


- Conduct Ss to do exercises of language
focus (P.78-79)


<i>+ Tim should work harder on his</i>
<i>spanish pronunciation.</i>


<i>+ Miss Jackson said you should</i>
<i>work harder on your Spanish</i>
<i>pronunciation.</i>


- Listen to the t and copy


- Make sentences


- Do exercise 5: Complete the
sentences. Use ...


Ss' answers may be:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(123)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=123>

<i>h) not as modern as</i>
<i>i) not as cheap as</i>


- Review.
- Copy



- Make examples
- Process as above


- Do exercises 3, 4, 5 on page
78-79 (text book)


<b>4. Consolidation: 2’</b>


- T reminds Ss to remember forms of comparison, comparative and superlative
adjectives


<b>5. Home work: 1’</b>


<b>- T asks Ss to make sentences, use comparison, comparative and superlative </b>
<b>adjectives.</b>


Week 19 <sub>Date of planning</sub> <sub>/12/09</sub>


Period 54 <sub>Date of teaching</sub> <sub>/12/09</sub>


Class 8A


<b>The test of first semester </b>


<b>Unit 9: a first - aid course</b>


getting started + listen and read+language focus 2
<b>A. The aims and requests</b>


<b>1. Objectives. </b>



- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to get acquainted with a new topic:
The first-aid. To help Ss to know more about the real situations which require
first -aid. And how to do the first -aid.


<b>2. Teaching point: </b>


+ Structure: <i>To review the present perfect tense</i>


+ Vocabulary: <i>nose bleed, bee sting, emergency, ambulance, counscious ... </i>


- Ss train communicative skill by practicing the dialogue....
<b>3. Preparation</b>


<b>+</b><i>Teacher</i>: Text book, work book, tape and cassette player,....


<b>+</b><i>Students</i>: Text book, work book, school things, ....
<b>B. Procedures.</b>


<b>1. Organization: (1 )</b>


-Good morning! How are you? Who’s absent today?
<b>2. Checking up/ Warm-up: (5-7’)</b>


T’ activities T Ss’ activities


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(124)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=124>

- Ask Ss to look at the picture on page 80,
and introduce some words about first-aid.
EX:



<i>+Bandage: băng</i>


<i>+Cotton balls: cuộn bông</i>
<i>+Tiger balm: dÇu con hỉ</i>


- Ss look at the picture, listen to the
T, and predict topic of the new
lesson.


<b>3. New lesson:</b>


T’ activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1. Presentation</b>


- Ask Ss to work in pairs to match the
situation with the pictures


- Ask Ss to give the answers.
+ A girl has a burn on her arm:


<i>Ointment: thuèc mì</i>


+ A boy has a bad cut on his leg :
+ A girl has a nose bleed:


<i>Absorbent cotton: b«ng thÊm níc</i>
+ A boy has a bee sting:


<i>Sting: nốt đốt</i>



- Make some questions:


<i>+ Who are talking in the conversation ?</i>
<i>+ Where are they ?</i>


<i>+ What happened ? Why ?</i>
<i>+ Where is the school ?</i>


- Introduce the situation of the dialogue,
that is about the girl, who fell of the bike,
have a bad cut on her head.


- Play the tape on page 80 (once)
- Present some new words:


<i>+Emergency: ca cÊp cøu.</i>
<i>+Ambulance: xe cÊp cøu</i>


<i>+Conscious: tØnh t¸o >< Uncoscious :</i>
<i>bất tỉnh.</i>


<i>+Bleed: chảy máu</i>
<i>+Wound: vết th¬ng</i>


<i>+Keep awake = Conscious</i>


<b>2. Practice</b>


- Play the tape again (twice)


- Let Ss practice the dialogue


15


- Work in pairs to match the
situation with the pictures


Ss' answers maybe:


+ <i>Ease the burn with ice,or cold</i>
<i>water pack, and cover with some</i>
<i>ointment and cover with a sterile</i>
<i>bandage.</i>


<i>+ Wash the cut with alcohol to</i>
<i>sterilize it, then cover it with a</i>


<i>bandage</i>.


<i>+ Let her stand straight and raise</i>
<i>her head behind, use some</i>
<i>absorbent cotton.</i>


<i>+ Wash the sting with alcohol, then</i>
<i>rub some ointment on it .</i>


- Answer the Qs:


<i>+ Lan and a nurse</i>



- Listen to the T


- Look at the dialogue and listen to
the tape.


- Read the new words (in chorus,
individually, and copy


- Listen to the tape again


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(125)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=125>

- Conduct Ss to practice exercise 2 (P.81)
- Ask some Ss to give their answers in
front of the class.


<b>3. Production</b>


- Ask Ss to work in pairs to discuss again
about the situations in the “<i>Getting</i>
<i>started.”</i>


15


7


class.


- Select the topic covered in the
dialogue.


- Give answers:


Ss' answers may be:


<i>a. discribing the condition of the</i>
<i>injured person.</i>


<i>b. asking for the address.</i>


<i>c. asking the condition of the</i>
<i>injured person.</i>


<i>e. giving first-aid instructions</i>


<i>f. arranging for an ambulance</i>.


- Work in pairs to discuss
<b>4. Consolidation: (2)</b>


- Ask the Ss to retell the main content of the lesson : “ How to do the
first-aids”, and how to protect yourself by the first- aids.


<b>5. Homework: (1 )</b>


- Ask Ss to learn by heart the dialogue.


Week 20 Date of planning 1/1/10


Period 56 Date of teaching 5/1/10


Class 8A



<b>Unit 9: a first - aid course</b>
Speak+language focus 3, 4
<b>A The aims and requests</b>


<b>1. Objectives. </b>


- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to practice speaking about more about
the first aid by using the simple future to make request , offers and promises
<b>2. Teaching point: </b>


- Structure: <i>Review requests, offers, promises, responses </i>


- Vocabulary: <i>Review vocabulaty, that are about the first-aid</i>


- Ss train speaking skill.
<b>3. Preparation</b>


<b>+Teacher: Text book, work book, picture...</b>


<b>+Students: Text book, work book, school things, ....</b>
<b>B. Procedures.</b>


<b>1. Organization: (1 )</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(126)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=126>

<b>2. Checking up/ Warm up (7)</b>


T’ activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1. Checking up</b>



- Ask some Ss to practice the dialogue of the
last lesson


<b>2. Warm up</b>


- Hold the class to play "Networks"


<i>Cover the woond</i>


4


3 - Play "Networks"


- Listen to the T, and revise.


<b>3. New lesson:</b>


T’ activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1.Pre-speaking</b>


- Introduce: <i>(In Unit 6, we learned about</i>
<i>the requests, reponses to requests. Today</i>
<i>we will use those structures in first-aid</i>
<i>situations</i>).


- Ask Ss to look at book, and read the structures.
<b>Requests</b>


<i>(Đề nghị </i>


<i>đ-ợc giúp đỡ)</i>


<b>Offers</b>


<i>(Đa ra đề</i>
<i>nghị giúp đỡ)</i>


<b>Promises</b>


<i>(Lêi høa)</i>


Can /


could
you ...?


Will /


would
you ....?


Would you
like ...?


What can I
get for you ?
Shall I ...?
Will / would
you have ...?
Can I get


you ...?


I


will ...
., I
promise.
I promise, I
will...
I promise I
wo’nt...
I promise
to...


<b>2. While-speaking</b>


- Ask the Ss to work in pairs to practice
the requests, and responses to the
requests.


8


19


- Read and copy into
note-book-Work in groups to make
examples


EX: <i>Can you get me some</i>



<i>bandage</i> ?


- Work in pairs to practice the
requests, and responses to the
requests. <i>(exercise 2 - P.82</i>)
Note: <i>Ss study the pictures and</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(127)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=127>

- Help Ss some difficult situations


- Ask some Ss to practice in front of the
class.


<b>3. Post-speaking</b>


- Give out some situations:


<i>+ It’s very hot here .</i> ( Request )


<i>+ You look tired and hungry</i>. ( offer )


<i>+ Look at the grade for this month. I</i>
<i>think you should do better next month.</i>


(promise)


<i>+ Want to buy a watch for my sister. </i>


(offer)


7



<i>discuss what the people in the</i>
<i>pictures need.</i>


Eg: picture a)


Girl: <i>Could you give me a</i>
<i>bandage, please ?</i>


Boy: <i>Sure. Here you are</i>.
Ss' answers may be:


b) Sister: <i>Shall I get you some</i>
<i>medicine ?</i>


Boy: <i>Yes, please / That would be</i>
<i>nice. No, I' m fine</i>.


c) A: <i>Can you get me some</i>
<i>bandage?</i>


B: <i>Sure.</i>


d) A:<i> Would you like me to get</i>
<i>you some medicine?</i>


B: <i>That would be nice.</i>


e) Boy: <i>I promise I won't play</i>



<i>soccer in the house again</i>.


Mother: <i>I hope so / Don' t </i>
<i>forget.</i>


- Ss practice in pairs. Use the T' s
cues


A:<i>Could you open the windows, </i>


<i>please ?</i>


B:<i> All right.</i>


<b>4. Consolidation: (2)</b>


- Ask Ss to retell the phrases to express the requests , offers . and promises.
<b>5. Home work: (1)</b>


- Ask Ss to do the exercise 2, 3 (page : 55 - 56) in the work b


Week 20 Date of planning 1/1/10


Period 57 Date of teaching 7/1/10


Class 8A


<b>Unit 9: a first - aid course</b>
Listen+language 3
<b>A The aims and requests</b>



<b>1. Objectives.</b>


- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know more about the first aid by
using the simple future to make request , offers and promises


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(128)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=128>

+ Structure: <i>(Review)</i>


+ Vocabulary: <i>Stretcher, Crutches, wheelchair, scale, eye chart, paramedic, check</i>
<i>one' s eyesight, lean against ...</i>


- Ss train listening skill.
<b>3. Preparation</b>


<b>+Teacher: Text book, tape and cassette player,....</b>
<b>+Students: Text book, work book, school things,....</b>
<b>B. Procedures.</b>


<b>1. Organization: (1)</b>


-Good morning! How are you? Who’s absent today?
<b>2. Checking up/ Warm up: (5-7’)</b>


T’ activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1. Checking up </b>
- T gives exercise.


<i><b>Give the correct form of the verb in the </b></i>
<i><b>brackets </b></i>:



a) Would you mind (lend) me some money ?
b) I promise I (not do ) that again.


<i>c) Would you mind if I (close) the door?</i>
<i>d) Can I (get) you some water ?</i>


<i><b>*key: </b></i>a, lending. b, won’t do
c, closed d, get


<b>2. Warm up</b>


- Hold the class to play "Jumbled words"
mabluacne


ohspiatl
octdor
urnse
ounwd
meregenyc
ptiaten


<i>Ambulance</i>
<i>Hospital</i>
<i>Doctor</i>
<i>Nurse</i>
<i>Wound</i>
<i>Emergency</i>
<i>Patient</i>



3


4


- Do the exercise.


-Do "Jumbled words"


<b>3. New lesson:</b>


T’ activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1. Pre-listening</b>


- Ask Ss to look at the picture P.82.
- Give in English:


<i>+Stretcher: c¸i cáng</i>
<i>+Crutches: cái nạng</i>
<i>+Wheelchair: xe lăn</i>
<i>+Scale: cái cân</i>


<i>+Eye chart: bảng đo thÞ lùc</i>


- Introduce the content of the listening, and
listening’s order.


8


- Look at the picture and name the


things in Vietnamese.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(129)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=129>

<b>2. While-listening</b>
- Play the tape (twice)
- Let Ss discuss


- Play the tape again (once)
- Ask Ss to give their answers
- Give the right answers:


<i>A. Ambulance</i>
<i>B. Wheelchair</i>
<i>C. Crutches.</i>
<i>D. Eye chart</i>
<i>E. Scale</i>
<i>F. Stretcher</i>.
+ Correct order:
F - B - A - D - E - C


- Play the tape again (once)
<b>3. Post-listening</b>


- Give the extra exercise and ask the Ss to
work in pairs to complete.


<i>Headache, heart, leg , nose, scale, revive,</i>
<i>stretcher, toothache, Wheelchair, Aids,</i>
<i>ambulance, arm, bleed, cold, crutches, ease,</i>
<i>elevate, fall, flu, head</i> ...



- Ask Ss to read the words aloud in front of
the class.


16


10


- Look at the picture, listen and
match the letters A, B, C, D, E or F
to the correct words in the box, then
put them in the correect order.


- Listen to the tape


- Check answers with partners.
- Listen to the tape agian


- Give answers in front of the class.
- Check and copy the answers


- Listen to the tape again, check the
answers.


- Work in pairs to put the words in
the box into four groups


<i><b>+ Necessary for </b></i>
<i><b>patients</b></i>:...
<i><b>+ Part of the </b></i>



<i><b>body</b></i> :...
<i><b>+ Illness or </b></i>


<i><b>diseases</b></i> :...
<i><b>+Verbs</b></i>:...
<b>4. Consolidation: (2)</b>


- Aks the Ss to retell the main content of the listening and some main words
used in the hospital.


<b>5. Homework: (1)</b>


- T asks Ss to do Ex 4 (P.56) in workbook, and prepare for the next lesson.


Week 20 Date of planning 1/1/10


Period 58 Date of teaching 8/1/10


Class 8A


<b>Unit 9: a first - aid course</b>


Read+language focus 1
<b>A The aims and requests</b>


<b>1. Objectives.</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(130)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=130>

<b> 2. Teaching point: </b>


+ Structure: <i>+ Force SB to do ST </i>


<i>+ Let SB do ST </i>


+ Vocabulary: <i>Faint, lying flat, elevate , lower, victim , revive, ease the pain</i> ....
- Ss train reading comprehension skill.


<b>3. Preparation</b>


+Teacher: Text book, work book, tape and cassette player ...
<b>+Students: Text book, work book, school things, ....</b>


<b>B. Procedures.</b>
<b>1. Organization: (1)</b>


-Good morning! How are you? Who’s absent today?
<b>2. Checking up: (5-7’)</b>


Teacher’s activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1. Checking up </b>


- T asks Ss to write and read the newwords
of the last lesson.


<b>2. Warm up</b>


- Hold the class to do "Matching"
<i>(Hang the extra- board)</i>


<b>A</b> <b>Match</b> <b>B</b>



1. to
send
2. to
fall
3. to
have
4. to
come
5. to
drink
6. to
ease
7.to
keep


1 + ...
2 + ...
3 + ...
4 + ...
5 + ...


....


a. a cup of tea.
b. off the bike .
c. the window open.
d. out of the hospital.
e. a bad cut on the
head.



f. an ambulance to the
hospital


g. the pain with drugs.
3


4 <sub>- Work in groups to do matching.</sub>


<b>3. New lesson:</b>


Teacher’s activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1. Pre-reading</b>


- Introduce 3 emergency situations that
Ss will study in this lesson: <i><b>fainting, </b></i>
<i><b>shock and burns</b></i>.


- Present some new words:
<i>+Faint : ngÊt </i>


6 - Work in groups to discuss what we


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(131)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=131>

<i>+Lying flat: n»m th¼ng </i>


<i>+Elevate > < lower: nâng > < hạ.</i>
<i>+Victim : nạn nhân. </i>


<i>+Revive : Tỉnh lại </i>



<i>+Cool the burns: làm mát vết bỏng</i>
<i>+Ease the pain : giảm vết đau</i>


<i>+Minimize tissue damage : giảm tối đa</i>
<i>sự h hỏng các mô.</i>


<b>2. While-reading</b>
- Let Ss scan the text
- Play the tape (twice)
- Ask Ss to read the text
- Call Ss to give answers


- Correct Ss' answers, and give the right
answers:


<b>A. (fainting).</b>


<i>a. The victim should not sit or stand .</i>
<i>c.The victim’s head should be below the</i>
<i>level of your head. </i>


<i>e. The victim should drink a cup of tea</i>
<i>when reviving.</i>


B. (Shock)


<i>b. Victim can not drink wine or beer .</i>


<b> C. (Burn) </b>



<i>d. You should ease the pain with ice or</i>


<i>cold water packs</i>.


- Explain structures:


<i>+ Force SB to do ST </i>


+ Let SB do ST
<b>3. Post-reading</b>


- Hold the class to practice


20


8


- Work in pairs, scan the text and
choose the case for the treatments
mentioned in the book.


- Listen to the tape


- Read the text and choose the correct
case for the treatments mentioned in
the book.


<b>A. Fainting: ....</b>
<b>B. Shock: ...</b>
<b>C. Burns: ...</b>



- Check and copy the right answers.


- Work in groups to discuss:


<i>+If someone is shock. We should....</i>
<i>+If someone is fainting , we</i>
<i>should...</i>


<i>+If someone is having burn , we</i>
<i>should...</i>


<i>+If someone is having a bad hurt on</i>
<i>her arm, First we should</i>....


<b>4. Consolidation: (2)</b>


- T reminds Ss to remember emergency situations: fainting, shock and burns.


<b>5. Home work: (1)</b>


- Translate the text into Vietnamese.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(132)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=132>

Period 59 Date of teaching 11/1/10


Class 8A


<b>Unit 9: a first - aid course</b>
Write



<b>A The aims and requests</b>
<b>1. Objectives. </b>


- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to write a thank-you notes to a
friends or relatives


<b>2. Teaching point: </b>


+ Structure: <i>Review an informal letter</i>


+ Vocabulary: <i>Review</i>


- Ss train writing skill.
<b>3. Preparation</b>


<b>+ Teacher: Text book, work book, extra board</b> ...
<b>+ Students: Text book, work book, school things, ....</b>
<b>B. Procedures.</b>


<b>1. Organization: (1)</b>


-Good morning! How are you? Who’s absent today?
<b>2. Checking up/Warm-up: (5-7’)</b>


Teacher’s activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1.Warm - up</b>


- Ask Ss to give the outline of the letter.



- Ask Ss to read


5 - Work in groups to give the outline
of the letter that they' ve learnt.
<i><b>+ Heading:</b></i> - Writer ‘s address
- Date.


<i><b>+ Opening</b></i>.


<i><b>+ Body of the letter</b></i>.
<i><b>+ Closing</b></i>.


- Read the outline aloud.
<b>3. New lesson:</b>


Teacher’s activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1. Pre-writing</b>


- Make questions:


<i>Do you always write or receive thank-you</i>
<i>notes ? On which occasions ?</i>


- Ask Ss to look at the letter on page 84.
- Go round the class to help Ss


- Call some Ss to read their completed
letter in front of the class.



- Correct Ss' answers


- Answer the T' s Qs.


- Look at the thank-you note Nga
sent to Hoa, use the correct tense
forms of the verbs in brackets.


- Read the letter aloud


- Others check and remark their
partners' answers.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(133)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=133>

<b>2. While-writing</b>


- Conduct Ss to write a letter to a friend to
express their thanks for what he/she has
done. In the letter they invite their friend
to go on a picnic with them ....


- Ask some Ss to read their letter aloud in
front of the class.


- Give the extra-board, that is about a the
guiding letter.


<i>Dear Nam, </i>


<i>Thank you for the interesting book you</i>
<i>gave me on my birthday last week. It is a</i>


<i>wonderful book about Vietnamese</i>
<i>traditions. It helped to make my day much</i>
<i>more meaningful.</i>


<i>This week I have more free time , and</i>
<i>my family has decided to go on a pinic to</i>
<i>Tan Trao on Sunday. Why don’t you join</i>
<i>us ? We will be very happy to have you</i>
<i>along.</i>


<i> I ‘ll phone you tonight for details. I</i>
<i>love to see you then.</i>


<i>Your friend.</i>
<i>Mai.</i>


<b>3. Post-writing</b>


- Ask Ss to work in groups to write other
letters with other situations.


6


20


10


<i>(1) was (2) were (3) helped </i>
<i>(4) came (5) am (6) will phone</i> .



- Work individually to write the
thank- you note to a friend, and
invite him/ her to go on a picnic
with. Use the guilding questions.
EX:


<i>Dear Nam,</i>


<i>Thank for the interesting book you</i>
<i>gave me</i> ....


- Check writing with partners.
- Read the letter aloud.


- Look at the letter on the board,
then check


- Work in groups to write.
- Check with other groups
<b>4. Consolidation: (2)</b>


- T reminds Ss to remember form of a thank-you letter
<b>5. Home work: (1)</b>


- T asks Ss to write a thank-you letter to a friend or a relative.


Week 21 Date of planning 6/1/10


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(134)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=134>

Class 8A
<b>Unit 10: recycling</b>



getting started - listen and read
<b>A The aims and requests</b>


<b>1. Objectives. </b>


- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to get acquainted with the new topic:


<i>Recycling</i>.


<b>2. Teaching point: </b>


+ Structure: <i>Review </i>


+ Vocabulary: redue, reuse, protect environment, packaging, Friends of the
<i>Earth. ...</i>


- Ss train communicatve skill by practicing the dialogue....
<b>3. Preparation</b>


<b>+Teacher: Text book, work book, picture, tape and cassette player, extra-board....</b>
<b>+Students: Text book, work book, school things, ....</b>


<b>B. Procedures.</b>
<b>1. Organization: (1)</b>


-Good morning! How are you? Who’s absent today?
<b>2. Checking up/Warm-up: (5-7’)</b>


Teacher’s activities T Ss’ activities



<b>1.Warm-up</b>
- Make questions:


<i>+ Do you often participate in protecting</i>
<i>the environment? </i>


<i>+ What do you often do to protect the</i>


<i>environment</i> ?


5


- Discuss about the T' s questions


<b>3. New lesson:</b>


Teacher’s activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1. Presentation</b>


- Ask Ss to look at "Getting started", then
make a list of ways that help to reduce the
amount of garbage we produce.


- Call Ss to give their opinions


- Present some new words:


<i>+Cloth bag: tói vải</i>


<i>+Plastic bag: túi nhựa</i>


<i>+Banana/ lotus leaves: lá chuối, lá sen</i>


8


- Work in pairs to make a list of
ways that help to reduce the amount
of garbage we produce.


EX:


<i>+ We should use cloth bag instead</i>
<i>of plastic bag.</i>


<i>+ We shouldn't buy things </i>
<i>overpackaged</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(135)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=135>

<i>+Overpackaged: đóng gói quá nhiều</i>
<i>+Throw away products: sản phẩm vứt đi</i>
<i>sau khi dùng. </i>


<i>+Packaged: đợc đóng gói.</i>


<b>2. Practice</b>


- Introduce: <i>(We' re going to hear a</i>
<i>representative from "Friends of the Earth",</i>
<i>Miss Blake, talking to Ss of Quang Trung</i>
<i>school about recycling</i>) .



- Play the tape "<i>Listen and Read</i>". (twice)
- Call some groups to practice in front of
the class.


- Ask Ss to answer the questions from a)
to e) on P.90.


- Correct Ss' answers.


<b>3. Production</b>


- Ask Ss to list the things that they do to
reduce the garbage.


21


7


- Scan the logo on page 89, listen to
the T, and prepare to listen .


- Listen to the tape.


- Practice the dialogue in small
groups.


- Work in groups to answer the
questions.



- Give answers:
Ss' answers may be:


<i>a.Reduce means not buying</i>
<i>products which are overpackaged.</i>
<i>b.we can reuse things like</i>
<i>envelopes, glass, plastic bottles and</i>
<i>old plastic bags.</i>


<i>c.Recycle means not just throwing</i>
<i>things away. Try to find another use</i>
<i>for them.</i>


<i>d.We can look for information on</i>
<i>recycling things by having a contact</i>
<i>with an orgarnization like Friends</i>
<i>of the Earth, going to the local</i>
<i>library, or asking your family and</i>
<i>friends or scientific society.</i>


<i>e.Mrs Blake tells Lan that we</i>
<i>should not use plastic bags because</i>
<i>they are difficult to be destroyed, so</i>


<i>amount of garbage increases</i>.


- List the things, that will do to
reduce the garbage.


EX:



<i>+ Not throwing things away.</i>
<i>+ Reuse things.</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(136)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=136>

<i>overpackaged</i>.
<b>4. Consolidation: (2)</b>


- Ask the Ss to retell words and phrases about recycling
<b>5. Homework: (1)</b>


- Ask Ss to do exercise 1 + 2 ( P. 59 ) ( work book)


Week 21 Date of planning 6/1/10


Period 61 Date of teaching 14/1/10


Class 8A


<b>Unit 10: recycling</b>
speak


<b>A The aims and requests</b>
<b>1. Objectives. </b>


- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to distinguish which group of the
material belongs to such as: <i>paper, glass, metal</i>.


<b>2. Teaching point: </b>
- Structure: <i>Review</i>



- Vocabulary: <i>Metal, plastic, fabric, leather</i>, ....
- Ss train speaking skill.


<b>3. Preparation</b>


<b>+Teacher: Text book, work book,...</b>


<b>+Students: Text book, work book, school things, ....</b>
<b>B. Procedures.</b>


<b>1. Organization: (1)</b>


-Good morning! How are you? Who’s absent today?
<b>2. Checking up/Warm-up: (5-7’)</b>


Teacher’s activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1.Checking up</b>


- Ask some Ss to retell the dialogue of
the last lesson (in their own words)
<b>2. Warm-up</b>


- Hold the class to play "Jumbled
Words"




+ SUERE = REUSE



+ LERECCY = RECYCLE
+ LASPIC = PLASTIC
+ PRAW = WRAP


+ FRETLIIEZR = FERTILIZER


4


3


- Work in small groups to rewrite the
words:


- Read the words aloud in front of the
class.


<b>3. New lesson:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(137)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=137>

<b>1. Pre-speaking</b>


- Ask Ss to look at the pictures and
name the things in the picture in
English.


- Explain different words if the Ss
need a help.


<b>2. While-speaking</b>


- Give the structures to use to discuss.



<i>a. Which group do clothes belong</i>
<i>to ?</i>


<i>b.What can we do with those</i>
<i>clothes ?</i>


<i>c.Are fruit or leaves “vegetable</i>
<i>matter?”</i>


<i>d. What can we do with it ?</i>


- Ask Ss to look at the pictures and
dicide which group each item belongs
to.


- Give suggested answers:


<b>Paper: </b><i>Old / used books, cardboard</i>
<i>boxes ... </i>


<b>Glass: </b><i>Bottles, glasses ....</i>


<b>Plastic: </b><i>Plastic bags, plastic bottles ..</i>


<b>Metal: </b><i>Tins, drinking cans ....</i>


<b>Vegetable matter:</b> <i>Vegetables,</i>
<i>fruit ..</i>



<b>Fabric: </b><i>Old clothes, pieces of</i>
<i>materals ...</i>


<b>Leather: </b><i>Shoes, sandals ....</i>


<b>3. Post-speaking</b>


- Ask Ss to work in pairs to find more
items.


- Ask some pairs to read aloud the
words they found.


7


20


7


- Work in pairs to look at the pictures
and name the things in the picture in
English.


Ss' answers may be:


<i>Can, old newspaper, clothes, shoes,</i>
<i>vegetables, school bag. bottles</i>....


- Work in pairs to discuss the things in
the picture .



<i>- Put them in “ fabric ‘</i>


<i>- We can recycle them and make them</i>
<i>into paper.</i>


<i>- That ‘s right</i>


<i>- We can make it into compost or</i>
<i>fertilizers for our fields.</i>


- Work in pairs and decide which group
each item belongs to.


<b>Paper : </b>(giÊy) ...


<b>Glass: </b>(thuû tinh)...


<b>Plastic: </b>(nhựa)...


<b>Metal: </b>(kim loại)....


<b>Vegetable matter: </b>(chất rau)....


<b>Fabric: </b>(vải)....


<b>Leather: </b>(da)....


- Give answers:



- Check the answers with the T' s
suggestions.


- Work in pairs to find more items.
- Give finding words


<b>4. Consolidation: (2)</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(138)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=138>

- Ask Ss to learn by heart the words of the lesson, do exercise 3 page: 60 in the
work book


Week 22 Date of planning 12/1/10


Period 62 Date of teaching 15/1/10


Class 8A


<b>Unit 10: </b> <b>recycling</b>


Listen+LANGUAGE FOCUS 3
<b>A The aims and requests</b>


<b>1. Objectives.</b>


- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to learn how to make a compost heap.
<b>2. Teaching point: </b>


+ Structure: <i>Review.</i>


+ Vocabulary: <i>Compost heap, tealeaves, egg-shells, moisture, condensation ... </i>



- Ss train listening skill.
<b>3. Preparation</b>


<b>+Teacher: Text book, tape and cassette player, extra-board....</b>
<b>+Students: Text book, work book, school things,....</b>


<b>B. Procedures.</b>
<b>1. Organization: (1)</b>


-Good morning! How are you? Who’s absent today?
<b>2. Checking up/Warm-up: (5-7’)</b>


Teacher’s activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1.Checking-up.</b>


- T ask Ss to write and read the words of above
lesson.


<b>2. Warm up</b>


- Ask Ss to list the items relate to the following
things :


+ Paper:
+ Glass:
+ Plastic:


+ Vegetable matter:.


+ fabric:


+ Leather :


- Ask Ss to read the things they list.


3


4


- Write and read the words of
above lesson.


- Work in groups to list the items
relate to the things :


Ss' answers may be:


+ Paper: <i>paper, old newspaper,</i>
<i>books, ..</i>


+ Glass: <i>bottles, glasses, jars</i>


+ Plastic: <i>plastic bags, plastic</i>
<i>bottles</i>.


+ Vegetable matter: <i>friut,</i>
<i>vegetables...</i>


+ Fabric: <i>clothes, pieces of</i>


<i>material</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(139)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=139>

- Write down and read them in
chorus.


<b>3. New lesson:</b><sub>4 - </sub>
5 -


6


<i>-d. Place in the garden.</i>
<i>e. Use as fertilizer.</i>
<i>f. Keep for six months.</i>


1 – b 2 – d 3 - a
4 – c 5 – f 6 - e
- Give answers.


<b>4. Consolidation: (3)</b>


- Aks the Ss to retell the way of making a compost heap.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(140)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=140>

- Learn by heart the way of making a compost heap.
- T asks Ss to learn the past participle , and prepare for reading .


Week 22 Date of planning 12/1/10


Period 63 Date of teaching 18/1/10


Class 8A



<b>Unit 10: recycling</b>
reading


<b>A The aims and requests</b>
<b>1. Objectives.</b>


- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to learn how to recycle things such
as: glass, car tires, bottles, ...


<b>2. Teaching point: </b>


+ Structure: <i>+ Passive voice</i>


+ Vocabulary: <i>Pipe, refill, deposit ...</i>


- Ss train reading and answering skill.
<b>3. Preparation</b>


<b>+Teacher: Text book, work book, tape and cassette player, picture ...</b>
<b>+Students: Text book, work book, school things, ....</b>


<b>B. Procedures.</b>
<b>1. Organization: (1)</b>


-Good morning! How are you? Who’s absent today?
<b>2. Checking up/Warm-up: (5-7</b>’)


Teacher’s activities T Ss’ activities



<b>1. Checking up</b>


- T asks one student to retell ways of making a
compost heap.


<b>2.Warm-up</b>


- Hang the picture on BB, then ask Ss to talk
about the picture.


3


4


- Work in groups to look at the
picture, discuss about the ways of
recycling.


EX:


+ Put garbage into ...


<b>3. New lesson:</b>


Teacher’s activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1. Pre-reading</b>


- Ask Ss to look at the pictures.
- Make questions:



<i>a, What can we do with car tires / bottles /</i>
<i>glass ...?</i>


<i>b, How can we make it into...?</i>


- Introduce some new words:


6


- Look at the pictures.


- Work in groups to discuss about
the T' s questions.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(141)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=141>

+<i>Pipe: ống nớc</i>
<i>+ Refill :đổ đầy lại</i>
<i>+Deposit: tiền đặt cọc.</i>


- Conduct Ss to prepare to read an article in
the invironmental page of a newspaper.


<b>2. While-reading</b>
- Let Ss scan the text


- Present the new structure:


<b>* Passive forms with present simple and</b>
<b>future simple:</b>



+ " (am / is / are) + Past participle (PII)"
+ " (shall / will) be + Past participle (PII)"
- Compare active and passive:


Active: I do this exercise.
1 2 3


Passive: This exercise is done by me.
3 2 1
- Let Ss read the text


- Ask Ss to give their answers.


- Correct Ss' answers, and give the right As.


<i>a) People cleaned and refilled empty milk</i>
<i>bottles.</i>


<i>b) The glass is broken up, melted and made</i>
<i>into new glassware.</i>


<i>c) The Oregon government made a new law</i>
<i>that there must be a deposit on drink cans.</i>
<i>The deposit is returned when people bring</i>
<i>the cans back for rycling.</i>


<i>d) Compost is made from household and</i>
<i>garden waste.</i>


<i>e) If we have a recycling story to share,</i>


<i>we can call or fax the magazine at 5 265</i>
<i>456.</i>


- Ask Ss to read the text again and do
exercise 2.


<i>* Answerkey.</i>


<i>+ Car tires <b>are recycled to make pipes and</b></i>


<i><b>floor coverings.</b></i>


<i>+ Milk bottles <b>are cleaned and refilled</b></i>
<i><b>(with milk)</b></i>


21


- Prepare to read an article in the
invironmental page of a newspaper
then answer the questions.


- Scan the text.


- Listen to the T, and learn new
structure.


- Copy the new forms.


- Make examples



- Read the text again and answer
the questions.


- Give answers in front of the
class.


- Check and copy the right As.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(142)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=142>

<i>+ Glass <b>is broken up, melted and made</b></i>
<i><b>into new glassware.</b></i>


<i>+ Drink cans <b>are brought back for</b></i>


<i><b>recycling.</b></i>


<i>+ Household and garden</i> <i><b>waste</b></i> <i><b>is made</b></i>


<i><b>into compost</b></i>.
<b>3. Post-reading</b>


- Ask some Ss to read the text aloud in front
of the class.


- Help Ss to translate the text into
Vietnamese.


9


- Read the text aloud.



- Translate the text into
Vietnamese


<b>4. Consolidation: (1)</b>


- T reminds Ss to remember recycling


<b>5. Home work: (1)</b>


- Ask Ss to do exercise 4 , 5 on page 61 (work book)


<b>Week</b> <b>22</b> Date of planning 12/1/10


<b>Period</b> <b>64</b> Date of teaching 19/1/10


Class 8A


<b> Unit 10: recycling</b>
writing


<b>A The aims and requests</b>
<b>1. Objectives. </b>


- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be provided how to recycle things like paper,
tea ...


<b>2. Teaching point: </b>


+ Structure: <i>Review </i>



+ Vocabulary: <i>soak, bucket, mash, wire mesh, mixture, firmly ...</i>


- Ss train writing skill.
<b>3. Preparation</b>


<b>+Teacher: Text book, work book, extra board ...</b>
<b>+Students: Text book, work book, school things, ....</b>
<b>B. Procedures.</b>


<b>1. Organization: (1)</b>


-Good morning! How are you? Who’s absent today?
<b>2. Checking up/Warm-up: (5-7</b>’)


Teacher’s activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1.Checking up</b>


- Ask Ss to tell some things that can be


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(143)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=143>

recycled.
<b>2.Warm-up</b>


- Ask Ss to list things that we can use to
recycle.


- Ask Ss to read


*Answers may be:



<i>Paper , glass, bottle , used paper, car </i>
<i>tires, school bags, plastic bags</i>, ...


3 - Work in groups to list things that we
can use to recycle.


- Read aloud the words given


<b>3. New lesson:</b>


Teacher’s activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1. Pre-writing </b>


- Introduce the lesson then ask Ss to
read and complete the recycling
instructions.


- Ask Ss to give their As.
- Give the right As:


<i>(1) use. (2) mix (3) Place (4)</i>


<i>press (5) Wrap</i> <i>(6) Wait</i> <i>(7)</i>


<i>dry </i>


- Present new words:


<i>+Soak : làm thấm , ngâm, ớt.</i>


<i>+Dry: phơi khô.</i>


<i>+Press: n ,ố</i>


<i>+Bucket: thùng, xô</i>
<i>+Over night: qua đêm.</i>
<i>+Wooden spoon; thìa gỗ</i>
<i>+Mash: bóp nghiền nát</i>
<i>+Wire mesh: lới st</i>


<i>+Mixture: hỗn hợp</i>
<i>+Firmly: mạnh, chặt.</i>


<b>2. While-writing</b>


- Conduct Ss to make the instructions
on how to prepare the tea leaves.
- Explain some words:


<i>+Scatter: rải, rắc</i>
<i>+Tray : khay, m©m</i>


- Give suggested As on the
extra-board.


<i>a) First, take the used tea leaves from</i>
<i>the teapot.</i>


<i>b) Next, scatter the tea leaves on a</i>
<i>tray.</i>



10


17


- Work in pairs to read the recycling
instructions and fill the verbs given in
the blanks.


- Give As in front of the class.
- Check and copy the right As.


- Learn the words.


- Work in individual to write
instructions on how to repare the tea.


- Read the writings aloud in front of the
class.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(144)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=144>

<i>c) Then, dry the leaves in the sun.</i>
<i>d) Finally , put the dry leaves in a pot</i>
<i>for future use.</i>


<b>3. Post-writing</b>


- Ask Ss to do the exercise:


* Arrange the steps to recycle the
<b>car tyres into the sandals:</b>



<i>1. Remove all dirty substances.</i>
<i>2. Put them into the production line.</i>
<i>3. Collect the old tyres and put them</i>
<i>in reserve.</i>


<i>4. And add some necessary matters.</i>
<i>5. Melt the tyres carefully.</i>


<i>6. Get the sandals available and</i>


<i>introduce them to the market</i>.


9


- Work in groups to arrange the steps to
recycle the car tyres into the sandals:
* Ss' answers may be:


3 - 5 - 1 - 4 - 2 - 6


<b>4. Consolidation: (2)</b>


- T reminds Ss to remember the instructions of recycling paper and tea
<b>5. Home work: (1)</b>


- T asks Ss to learn by heart the instructions of recycling paper and tea. To do exercise 7
on page 63 (work book)


Week 22 Date of planning 12/1/10



Period 65 Date of teaching 22/1/10


Class 8A


<b>LANGUAGE FOCUS 1, 2, 4</b>
<b>A The aims and requests</b>


<b>1. Objectives. </b>


<i>-By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to form the passive in Present simple /</i>


<i>Future simple and structures with Adjectives</i> .


<b>2. Teaching point: </b>


<i>passive in Present simple / Future simple and structures with Adjectives</i> .


<b>3. Preparation</b>


<b>+Teacher: Text book, Cardboards , poster , handouts ….</b>
<b>+Students: Text book, work book, school things, ....</b>
<b>B. Procedures.</b>


<b>1. Organization: (1)</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(145)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=145>

<b>2. Checking up/Warm-up: (5-7’)</b>


<i><b>Teacher's activities</b></i> <sub>t</sub> <i><b>Ss' activities</b></i>



<b>1. Warm up : Questions game</b>


- Call on a student to go to the board and give him or
her a job name .


- Ask the rest of the class to guess the job by asking
yes-no questions


- The chosen student can only answer yes or no
- Tell someone who can guess the right job will get a
point and take the place of the last chosen student .
Example questions :


- Do you get a big salary ?
- Do you wear uniform ?


5


<b>3. New lesson:</b>


<i><b>Teacher's activities</b></i> <sub>t</sub> <i><b>Ss' activities</b></i>


<b>1. The passive forms </b>


<b>1.1 Passive Form in the Present Simple </b>
S + am / is / are + past participle


=> It is used when the subject is affected by the action
of the verb .



Ex 1 : Work with a partner
- Ordering pictures :


+ Ask Ss to read the instructions and look at the
pictures to put them in the correct order according to
the instructions


+ Call on some groups to give their answers .
+ Give feedback a.1 b.4 c.3 d.5 e.2 f.6
- Writing :


+ Ask Ss to rewrite the sentences in the passive form
+ Let them compare their writing and ask Ss to go to
the board and write their sentences


+ Correct and give feedback


<b>1.2 Passive Form in the Future Simple </b>
<b>S + will / shall + be + past participle</b>
- Have Ss copy down


- Show Ss the questions ( o) and ask them to fill in
the gaps , using the Passive


- Call on Ss to give their answers and correct
1. … will be shown


2. Will … be built …..?
3. … will be finished …. 4.
Will … be made … ?



<b>2. Adjectives followed by an infinitive / a noun </b>


12


10


7


Teacher – Ss


Pair work


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(146)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=146>

<b>clause </b>


<b>2.1. It + be + adjective + to infinitive </b>


Example : It is very difficult to speak English well
Ex 3 : Complete the sentences


- Ask Ss to open their books and complete the
dialogues


- Call on some pairs to demonstrate the dialogues and
correct


<b>2.2 . S + be + adj + that / noun clause </b>


Example : We are delighted that you passed the
English exam .



- Get Ss to copy .


Ex 4 : Complete the letter


- Ask Ss to read the letter and match the words .


A B Key


1. relieved (a)
2. Congratulation
3. Look forward to(
4. confirm (v)


a. xin chuc mung
b. trong cho
c. xac nhan lai
d. nhe nhom


1.d
2.a
3.b
4. c
- Ask Ss to copy the vocabulary


- Ask ss to work in pairs to complete the letter using
the words in the box


- Get some Ss to give their answers
- Give feedback and correct



0. are delighted
1. was happy
2. am relieved
3. is afraid


4. Are … sure …
5. am certain


- Call on some Ss to read the complete letter aloud


8


Teacher – Ss


Individual


Whole class


Pair work


Teacher – Ss
Whole class
Individual


Read the letter aloud
Listen and copy


<b>4. Consolidation: (2)</b>



-Sum up the content of the lesson
<b>5. Home work: (1)</b>


- Do some exs in Ss’ workbook and prepare for new part.


Week 22 Date of planning 15/1/10


Period 66 Date of teaching 22/1/10


Class 8A


<b>Unit 11: traveling around vietnam</b>
getting started - listen and read
<b>A The aims and requests</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(147)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=147>

- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to learn more about the interesting
places in Viet nam such as : The Temple of Literature, Ha Long Bay, Nha
Trang Habor...


<b>2. Teaching point: </b>


+ Structure: <i>Polite requests with "would" ...</i>
+ Vocabulary: redue,


- Ss train communicatve skill by practicing the dialogue....
<b>3. Preparation</b>


<b>+Teacher: Text book, work book, tape and cassette player, </b>extra-board....
<b>+Students: Text book, work book, school things, ....</b>



<b>B. Procedures.</b>
<b>1. Organization: (1 )</b>


-Good morning! How are you? Who’s absent today?
<b>2. Checking up: (5-7</b>’)


Teacher’s activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1.Warm-up</b>


- Hold the class to play "Networks"
5


- Work in groups to find famous places in
Viet Nam.


<b>3. New lesson:</b>


Teacher’s activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1. Presentation</b>


- Hang the picture on the BB.
- Give the right name of the places:
+ Ngo Mon Gate


+ Nha Rong Harbor


+ The Temple of Literature.
+ Ha Long Bay



<b>2. Practice</b>


- Introduce the lesson and play the tape
(once)


- Make questios:


<i>a. Who are talking in the conversation ?</i>
<i>b. Where are they ?</i>


- Present new words and phrases:
<i>+Front seat: ghÕ tríc</i>


5


24


- Work in group to look at the
picture, and tell name of places:


+ Ngọ môn.


+ Cảng Nhà Rồng
+ Văn Miếu


+ Vịnh H¹ Long


- Match the words.
- Listen to the tape



- Answer the T' s questions:


<i>+ Mr and Mrs Jones, Shannan, Hoa </i>
<i>and Tim.</i>


<i>+ They are on the way through a </i>


<b>Famous places</b>


Ha Noi


HCM


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(148)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=148>

<i>+Water buffalo: con tr©u</i>
<i>+Crop : mïa vô</i>
<i>+Corn : ngô</i>


<i>+Sugar cane : cây mía</i>
<i>+Take a photo : chơp ¶nh</i>


<b>* Polite requests:</b>


+ Would you mind + V-ing ...?
<i> + Would you mind if I + V-ed ...?</i>
<i> See (SB) do / doing (ST).</i>


- Play the tape again (twice)


- Call Ss to read their answers in front of


the class.


<b>3. Production</b>


- Make questions:


<i>1)Where does Hoa meet Tim ?</i>


<i>2)Who does Tim come to Vietnam with ?</i>
<i>3) How do they travel to Hanoi ?</i>


<i>4) How long does it take them to get to</i>
<i>Hanoi ?</i>


7


<i>paddy field</i>.


- Read and copy new words:


- Make examples ...


EX: <i>Would you mind if I closed the</i>
<i>door</i> ?


- Listen to the tape again, and check
() True or False the sentences.
* Answers may be:


a) T b) T



c) F (Not in a bus in a taxi).
d) T e) T


f) F (not only rice and corn but also
<i>sugar canes are grown aroud Hanoi)</i>
- Work in pairs to practice asking
and answering the questions.


- Ss' answers may be:


1) <i>Hoa meet Tim at the airport.</i>


<i>2) Tim come to Vietnam with his</i>
<i>parents and sister.</i>


<i>3) They travel to Hanoi by taxi.</i>
<i>4) It take them 40 minutes</i>.
<b>4. Consolidation: (2)</b>


- Ask the Ss to retell the content of the lesson in their own words.
<b>5. Homework: (1)</b>


- Ask Ss to learn by heart the dialogue.


Week Date of planning


Period 67 Date of teaching


Class 8A



<b>Unit 11: traveling around vietnam</b>
Speak+language focus 3, 4


<b>A The aims and requests</b>
<b>1. Objectives. </b>


- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to product requests : <i>"Would/Do you</i>
<i>mind... ?</i>" in many communication situations and how to respond to the
requests.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(149)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=149>

- Structure: <i>Requests</i>


- Vocabulary: Review
- Ss train speaking skill.
<b>3. Preparation</b>


<b>+Teacher: Text book, work book,...</b>


<b>+Students: Text book, work book, school things, ....</b>
<b>B. Procedures.</b>


<b>1. Organization: (1)</b>


-Good morning! How are you? Who’s absent today?
<b>2. Checking up/Warm-up: (5-7</b>’)


Teacher’s activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1. Checking up </b>



- Ask Ss to roleplay the dialogue of the last
lesson.


<b>2. Warm up</b>


- Give suggestions:


<i>+ Close the door.</i>


<i>+ Give the glass of cold water.</i>
<i>+ Take photographs</i>


<i>+ Open the door.</i>
<i>+ Buy a pen</i>.


3


4


- Work in small groups to make
polite requests with mind, usse
the T' s suggestions.


EX:


<i>+ Would you mind closing the</i>
<i>door.</i>


<i>+ Would you mind giving the</i>


<i>glass of cold water.</i>


<i>...</i>.
<b>3. New lesson:</b>


Teacher’s activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1. Pre-speaking</b>


- Hold the class to review request with
"mind".


<b>* Request.</b>


<i>+ Do you mind <b>closing</b> the door?</i>


<i>+ Would you mind <b>opening</b> the window ?</i>


<i>+ Do you mind if <b>I take</b> a photo ?</i>


<i>+ Would you mind if <b>I took</b> a photo ?</i>


<b>* Reply: </b>


<i>- No, I don’t.</i>


<i>- No, of course not.</i>
<i>- Not at all.</i>


<i>- Please do</i>.



<i>+ I’m sorry I can’t .</i>


<i>+ I’m sorry, that is not possible.</i>
<i>+ I’d prefer you didn’t.</i>


6 - Review (look at book, and
listen to the T).


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(150)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=150>

<i>+ I’d rather you didn’t</i>.
<b>2. While-speaking</b>
- Conduct Ss to speak.


- Call some better pairs to practice in front of
the class.


- Give the suggested answers:
A. Excuse me. Can you help me ?
B. Yes, sir. What can I do for you ?


A. Yes ,Could you please give me some
information, please ?


B. Yes, of course. What information do you
want ?


A. I want to visit a museum. Would you mind
suggesting one ?


B. I suggest you go to the History Museum.


A. That sounds interesting. Do you mind
telling me what time it hapens?


B. It opens from 8 am to 4 pm everyday
except Monday.


A. Thank you.


B. You are welcome. Have a nice day.
<b>3. Post-speaking</b>


- Conduct Ss to practice: (<i>Suppose that you</i>
<i>meet a tourist who visits Tuyen Quang for</i>
<i>the first time. The tourist wants to know some</i>
<i>places in TQ. You work in pairs to make a</i>
<i>similar dialogue , using the places of interest</i>


<i>in Tuyen Quang</i>.)


16


10


- Work in pairs one is student A
and the other is student B. Look at
the information, and use it to
make requests and suggestions.
- Practice in front of the class.
- Check the answers, and copy



- Listen to the T' s guidings, then
practice in pairs.


EX:


You: <i>Can I help you ?</i>


Tourist: <i>This is the first time I</i>
<i>have been to Tuyen Quang. Do</i>
<i>you mind telling me some places</i>
<i>that I can visit ?</i>


You: <i>Yes, certainly. I suugest you</i>
<i>go to Hong Thai Communal</i>
<i>House in Tan Trao, ...</i>.


Tourist: <i>How can I get there ?</i>


<b>4. Consolidation: (1)</b>


- Ask Ss to review the suggestion with “ Would you mind ...?“
<b>5. Home work: (1)</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(151)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=151>

Week Date of planning


Period 68 Date of teaching


Class 8A


<b>Unit 11: traveling around vietnam</b>


Listen+language focus 1, 2


<b>A The aims and requests</b>
<b>1. Objectives.</b>


- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to review how to describe the
possition of some famous places by using : <i>opposite, beside, in the direction</i>
<i>of</i> ...


<b>2. Teaching point: </b>


+ Structure: <i>Review.</i>


+ Vocabulary: <i>Review.</i>


- Ss train giving directions skill.
<b>3. Preparation</b>


<b>+Teacher: Text book, tape and cassette player, extra-board....</b>
<b>+Students: Text book, work book, school things,....</b>


<b>B. Procedures.</b>


<b>1. Organization: (1 m)</b>


-Good morning! How are you? Who’s absent today?
<b>2. Checking up: (5-7</b>’)


Teacher’s activities T Ss’ activities



<b>1. Checking up </b>


- T ask Ss to give 5 sentences, that they wrote at
home.


<b>2. Warm up</b>


- Ask Ss to give ways of asking for directions
and the ways of replying them.


3


4 - Work in groups to ask for<sub>directions and the ways of</sub>
replying them.


- Write on the BB.
EX:


- Turn left, turn right, go ahead.
- Go straight a head, take the
first street on the left/ right.
<b>3. New lesson:</b>


Teacher’s activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1. Pre-listening</b>


- Make questions:


a. How many roads / streets / offices are


there ?


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(152)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=152>

- Review name of the places:


<i>+Highway: đờng cao tốc.</i>


<i>+Tourist information center : trung tâm</i>
<i>thông tin du lịch.</i>


<i>+Bus station : trạm xe buýt.</i>
<i>+Hotel: khách sạn</i>


<i>+Pagoda: n</i>
<i>+Temple: chùa.</i>


<i>+Restaurant: nhµ hµng</i>


- Introduce the listening
<b>2. While-listening</b>


- Play the tape Listen P.102 (3 times)
- Ask Ss to give their answers.


- Give the correct answers:


a) restaurant
<i>b) hotel.</i>
<i>c) bus station.</i>
<i>d) pagoda.</i>
e) temple.



- Play the tape again (once) to let Ss check
their answers.


<b>3. Post-listening</b>


- Give the extra board that is about some
places in Dong Tho.


- Ask Ss to give the direction of the places.
Dong Tho hospital.


<i> Dong Tho post office.</i>
<i> Dong Tho bank</i>


<i> Dong Tho market.</i>


- Ask some pairs to practice in front of the
class.


12


10


+ There are ...


- Review name of the places:


- Listen to the T



- Listen to the tape and match
the places in the box to their
correct positions on the map.
- Check answers with partners.
- Check and copy the right
answers


- Look at the board


- Work in pairs to give the
direction of the places.


- Work in front of the class.
EX:


A: Could you tell me the way to
<i>Dong Tho bank ?</i>


B: Yes , of course. You must go
straight this road. Then you take
the first street on the right. Go
along about 20 meters, The
bank is on your right.


<b>4. Consolidation: (1)</b>


- Aks the Ss to remember the ways of asking for the direction.


<b>5. Home work: (1)</b>



- Do the exercise 5 + 6 (P. 67 ) work book.


<b>Week</b> Date of planning


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(153)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=153>

Class 8A
<b>Unit 11: traveling around vietnam</b>


reading


<b>A The aims and requests</b>
<b>1. Objectives.</b>


- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be provided the main information about the
sights, accomodation of some famous places in Vietnam such as: Nha Trang,
Da Lat, Sapa, Ha Long Bay.


<b>2. Teaching point: </b>


+ Structure: <i>Review</i>


+ Vocabulary: Seaside resort, Oceanic Institute, Griant Buddha, Offshore island,
<i>External spring, Water fall ....</i>


- Ss train reading tourist advertisement.
<b>3. Preparation</b>


<b>+Teacher: Text book, work book, tape and cassette player, ...</b>
<b>+Students: Text book, work book, school things, ....</b>


<b>B. Procedures.</b>


<b>1. Organization: (1)</b>


-Good morning! How are you? Who’s absent today?
<b>2. Checking up: (5-7</b>’)


Teacher’s activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1.Warm up</b>


- Devide the class into two groups . which group
give the correct answer will the win group.


It’s a southern city established a bit more than
three hundred years ago. (In the exercise book).


5 - Work in groups to play the
guessing game.


EX:


<i>+ It has a lot of caves.</i>
<i>+ It consists of ...</i>


<b>3. New lesson:</b>


Teacher’s activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1. Pre-reading</b>


- Introduce the topic of the reading and


present some new words:


<i>+Seaside resort: khu nghỉ mát bãi biển.</i>
<i>+Oceanic Institute: Viện Hải Dơng học</i>
<i>+Griant Buddha: Tợng phật khổng lồ.</i>
<i>+Offshore island: đảo xa bờ</i>


<i>+External spring: Mïa xuân vĩnh cửu</i>
<i>+Water fall: thác nớc</i>


<i>+Mountainous resort: Khu ngh mỏt vùng núi</i>
<i>+Tribal village: Bản làng của ngời dân tộc.</i>
<i>+Mountain slopes: Những sờn núi</i>
<i>+Limestone island: Đảo đá vôi.</i>


<i>+UNESCO (United Nations Educaditional</i>


8


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(154)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=154>

<i>Scientific and Cultural organization): Tæ</i>
<i>chøc Gi¸o dơc, Khoa học và Văn hoá của</i>
<i>Liên Hợp Quốc.</i>


<i>+World Heritage: Di sản Văn ho¸ ThÕ giíi.</i>
+Magnificient: Léng lÉy.


<b>2. While-reading</b>


- Let Ss scan the advertisements



- Ask Ss to read the advertisements again
and check the topics mentioned in the
brochures about the resorts.


- Ask Ss to give answers.


- Correct Ss' answers, and give the right As.


<b>Nha</b>
<b>Trang</b>


<b>Da</b>
<b>Lat</b>


<b>Sa</b>
<b>Pa</b>


<b>Ha</b>
<b>Long</b>


Caves 


Flights to HN    


Hotels 


Local transport    


Mini-hotels 



Mountain


slopes 


Railway   


Restaurants


Sand beaches 


Tourist


attractions    


Types of food


Villages 


Waterfalls 


World Heritage 


- Ask Ss to do the exercise 2 (P.105).


- Ask the groups to give As


- Correct Ss' answers, and give the right As.


<b>Nha</b>



<b>Trang</b> <b>DaLat</b> <b>SaPa</b>


<b>Ha</b>
<b>Long</b>


a) 


b)    


c) 


d) 


e) 


<b>3. Post-reading</b>


- Ask some Ss to read the texts again and tell
the main content of the advertisements.


24


- Work individually to scan the
advertisements.


- Work in small groups to read
the advertisements again and
check the topics mentioned in
the brochures about the resorts.
- Read answers aloud in front


of the class.


- Check and copy the right
answers.


- Work in small groups to
answer and check suitable
places.


- The groups give answers in
front of the class.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(155)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=155>

6


answers.


- Read the advertisements
again.


<b>4. Consolidation: (1)</b>


- T reminds Ss to remember the main content of the reading.


<b>5. Home work:</b> (1)


- Ask Ss to learn by heart the characters of the places above.


Week Date of planning


Period 70 Date of teaching



Class 8A


<b>Unit 11: traveling around vietnam</b>
writing


<b>A The aims and requests</b>
<b>1. Objectives. </b>


- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to describe the chronogical trip or
trip space order.


<b>2. Teaching point: </b>
+ Structure: <i>Review </i>


+ Vocabulary: Adventure, paddle, canoe ....


- Ss train narrative writing.
<b>3. Preparation</b>


<b>+Teacher: Text book, work book, extra board ...</b>
<b>+Students: Text book, work book, school things, ....</b>
<b>B. Procedures.</b>


<b>1. Organization: (1 m)</b>


-Good morning! How are you? Who’s absent today?
<b>2. Checking up: (5-7</b>’)


Teacher’s activities T Ss’ activities



<b>1. Checking up </b>


- Ask Ss to tell about the places of the
last lesson.


<b>2. Warm – up</b>


- Ask Ss to play the Matching with the
world heritage sites.1. Ha long bay.


3


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(156)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=156>

<i>2. Phong nha – ke bang Natural park.</i>
<i>3. Coplex of Hue monuments.</i>


<i>4. My son Sanctuary.</i>
5. Hoi an Ancient town.


4


<b>3. New lesson:</b>


Teacher’s activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1. Pre-writing</b>


- Make questions.


<i>+ Where did the Browns go last week?</i>


<i>+ What was the weather like ?</i>


- Present new words.


+Adventure: chuyến phiêu lu.
<i>+Paddle : đạp nớc, tay chèo.</i>
<i>+ Canoe: ca nô. </i>


<b>2.While-writing</b>


- Ask Ss to read the next part of the
story and rewrite the story in the
correct chronological.


- Ask the groups to give As.


- Give the suggested As (on the extra
board):


<i>a)The wind started to blow huge</i>
<i>waves, and the rain became heavier.</i>
<i>b)The canoe moved up and down the</i>
<i>water.</i>


<i>c)Shannon dropped her paddle.</i>


<i>d)She leaned over and tried to pick it</i>
<i>up.</i>


<i>e)The canoe overturned and everyone</i>


<i>fell into the deep and dangerous water.</i>
<i>f)A boat appeared and recused them.</i>
<i>g)The family was very lucky.</i>


<b>3. Post-writing</b>


- Hold the class to do 15 minutes test.
- Ask Ss to look at the pictures
(P.106-107) and put the events in the correct
order and complete the story by using
the pictures.


6


11


15


- Read the text (P.105) and answer the
questions.


+ Ss' answers:


- Read and copy new words:


- Work in small groups to read the next
part of the story and rewrite the story in
the correct chronological.


- Give As.


- Check As:


- Work individually to look at the
pictures (P.106-107) and put the events
in the correct order and complete the
story by using the pictures.


(Do on paper)
Answers key:


<i>b)She realized her alarm clock did not</i>
<i>go off.</i>


<i>e)As she was leaving home , it started to</i>
<i>rain heavily.</i>


<i>h)Uyen tried to run as fast as she could.</i>
<i>a)Suddenly she stumble against a rock</i>
<i>(and she fell onto the road ).</i>


<i>f)Her school bag went into a pool , and</i>
<i>everything got wet.</i>


<i>c)Strangely, The rained stopped as she</i>
<i>got her classroom.</i>


<i>g)Luckily, Uyen had enough time to</i>
<i>finish her exam. </i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(157)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=157>

- T reminds Ss to remember ways of describing the chronogical trip or trip


space order.


<b>5. Homework: (1)</b>


- T asks Ss to do exercise 9 (P. 69) , work book.


Week Date of planning


Period 71 Date of teaching


Class 8A


<b>Review</b>
<b>A The aims and requests</b>


<b>1. Objectives. </b>


- By the end of the lesson, Ss will review Modal "will" to make requests, ofers,
promises. The passive forms. Requests with "Would/Do you mind if ...?;
Would/Do you mind + V-ing" .... ?


<b>2. Teaching point: </b>


+ Structure: <i>Review</i>


+ Vocabulary: <i>Structures and exercises.</i>


- Reviewing and doing exercises
<b>3. Preparation</b>



<b>+Teacher: Text book, work book, extra board ...</b>
<b>+Students: Text book, work book, school things, ....</b>
<b>B. Procedures.</b>


<b>1. Organization: (1)</b>


-Good morning! How are you? Who’s absent today?
<b>2. Checking up: </b>


<b>3. New lesson:</b>


Teacher’s activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1. Modal "Will": Request, offer, promise: </b>


- Repeat the uses and forms:


* We often use: "Will/would you please +
<i>verb ... ? </i>


With the answers:


<i>Yes, of course / No, I' m afraid ...</i>


- Examples:


<i>+ Will/ Would you please open the door for</i>
<i>me</i> ? (request).


<i>+ Will you carry that for me</i> ? (offer)



<i>+ He will pass his coming exam. He</i>


<i>promises</i>. (promise)


- Hold the class to do exercise 4 (language
focus).


*Answers may be:


13 - Listen to the T and review.
Make examples:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(158)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=158>

<i>b) Will you paint the door, please ?/I will</i>
<i>paint the door this afternoon.</i>


<i>c) Will you study harder, please ? / I will</i>
<i>study harder.</i>


<i>d) Will you carry the bag for me, please? /</i>
<i>Shall I carry tehe bag for you ?</i>


<i>e) Will you hang the washing, please ? / Shall</i>
<i>I hang the washing for you ?</i>


<i>f) Will you cut the grass, please ? / I will cut</i>
<i>the grass for you</i>.


<b>2. Passive voice</b>



- Repeat the forms of passive voice:


* Passive forms with present simple and
future simple:


+ "... (am / is / are) + Past participle (PII)"
+ "... (shall/ will) be + Past participle(PII)"
- Compare active and passive:


Active: I do this exercise.
1 2 3


Passive: This exercise is done by me.
3 2 1
Note:


+ Active form: S + V + Obj


+ Passive form: S + to be + PII + by + Obj
- Hold the class to do exercise 2 (P.96)
(language focus).


<b>3. Would/Do you mind ... ?:</b>


- Process as above
Note: <b>Request</b>


<i>If sentences can be used as an indirect way of</i>
<i>asking for permission especially if you don't</i>
<i>want to bother the listener.</i>



<i>EX: You want to open the window but you</i>
<i>think your friend might not want you to ...</i>
<i>Would you mind opening the window / If I</i>
<i>open the window ?</i>


- Hold the class to do exercise 3 + 4
(P.109-110) (language focus).


15


13


- Review and copy the forms.


Make example:


+ Act: <i>Nam drank that bottle of</i>
<i>milk</i>.


+ Pas: <i>That bottle of milk was</i>


<i>drunk (by Nam</i>).


...


- Do exercise 2 on page 96
(text book)


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(159)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=159>

- Do exercise 3 + 4 on page


109 - 110 (text book)


<b>4.Consolidation: (2)</b>


- T reminds Ss to remember forms of passive voice, request with "Would/Do
you mind If ... / V-ing ?


<b>5. Home work: (1)</b>


<b>- T asks Ss to review Unit 9, 10, 11 to prepare for the 4th<sub> test.</sub></b>


Week Date of planning


Period 72 Date of teaching


Class 8A


<b>Written Test</b>
<b>Time: 45 minutes</b>
<b>A The aims and requests</b>


<b>1. Objectives. </b>


- By the end of the test students will know what they need to improve in the future.
<b>2. Teaching point: </b>


Listen and complete the letter. Read the passage about Ha Long Bay, answer and
check T or F statements. Passive forms, requests, .... Vocabulary from Unit 9 to
Unit 12. Change sentences into passive.



- Ss check their skills on listening, reading and writing
<b>3. Preparation</b>


<b>+Teacher: Teaching plan, matrix, papers of questions ....</b>
<b>+Students: School things,....</b>


<b>B. Procedures.</b>
<b>1. Organization: (1)</b>


-Good morning! How are you? Who’s absent today?
<b>2. Checking up: </b>


<b>3. New lesson:</b>
Matrix:
<b>Unit</b>
<b>(Topic)</b>
<b>Content</b>


<b>s</b>


<b>Requirement</b>


<b>Total</b>


<b>Realize</b> <b><sub>thoroughly</sub>Grasp</b> <b>Apply</b>


<b>Object</b> <b>Subject Object</b> <b>Subjec<sub>t</sub></b> <b>Object Subject</b>


Listening 8 <i><sub>(1,75)</sub></i> <b>8</b> <i><b><sub>(1,75)</sub></b></i>



Reading 5 <i><sub>(1,25)</sub></i> 2 <i><sub>(1)</sub></i> <b>7</b> <i><b><sub>(2,25)</sub></b></i>


Writing 4 <i><sub>(2)</sub></i> <b>4</b> <i><b><sub>(2)</sub></b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(160)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=160>

r <i>(2,5)</i> <i><b>(2,5)</b></i>


Voca... 6 <i><sub>(1,5)</sub></i> <b>6</b> <i><b><sub>(1,5)</sub></b></i>


<b>Total</b> <b>14</b> <i><b><sub>(3,25)</sub></b></i> <b>17</b> <i><b><sub>(4,75)</sub></b></i> <b>4</b> <i><b><sub>(2)</sub></b></i> <b>35</b> <i><b><sub>(10)</sub></b></i>


<b>Questions </b>
<b>I- Listen and complete the letter. </b><i><b>(1,75 points)</b></i>
<i>Dear Mai,</i>


<i>We are having a wonderful time (1)... Hue. The people are</i>
<i>friendly and the weather has been warm and (2) ...</i>


<i>In Hue, I visited (3)... with Nam and</i>
<i>(4)... sister Lan. It was nice to see them.</i>


<i>I bought lots of souvenirs (5) ... you. Lan is always complaning</i>
<i>about the heaviness (6)... ... my suitcase.</i>


<i>See you (7) ...</i>
<i>Love</i>


<i>Hoa</i>


<b>II- Read the passage then decide whether the statements are true or false</b>
<b>check () the box. </b><i><b>(2,25 points)</b></i>



There are many famous places in Viet Nam, but many people think that Ha Long
Bay is one of the most beautiful. It is situated in Quang Ninh province.


Ha Long Bay was recognized by UNESCO as a world heritage site in 1994. It is
made up of 1,969 islands of various sizes, 989 of which have been given names.


Visiting Ha Long Bay, we can see many magnificent caves, beautiful islands, and
quiet sand beaches.


In Ha Long City, there are many hotels and mini hotels with reasonable price and
low priced guest house.


<b>* True or False: </b><i><b>(1,25 pts)</b></i> <b>T </b> <b>F</b>


1. There are many interesting places in Viet nam c c


2. Ha Long Bay is in Hai Phong City. c c


3. We can see many magnificent caves in Ha Long Bay c c
4. There are many hotels and mini hotels with high price. c c
5. There are not any beautiful islands, and sand beaches. c c
<b>* Answer the questions: (1 pt)</b>


1. How many islands are there in Ha Long Bay ?


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(161)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=161>

...
<b>III. Choose the best option A, B, C or D to complete the folowing sentences:</b>
<i><b>(2,5 points).</b></i>



1. Do you mind ... on the TV ?


A. turned B. turn C. to turn D. turning


2. Would you mind if I ... the door ?


A. opened B. open C. to open D. opening


3. The bottles were ... into small pieces.


A. break B. broken C. broke D. breaking


4. Paper is ... from woods.


A. make B. made C. making D. to make


5. The radio was ... by Nam yesterday.


A. repaired B. repairing C. repair D. repairs


6. Would you ... cleaning the floor for me ?


A. like B. please C. mind D. rather


7. Billions of cans are ... way every year all over the world.


A. throw B. thrown C. throwing D. threw


8. Could you ... a pen, please ? - Sure. Here you are.



A. give B. to give C. gave D. gave


9. Would you like ... to the restaurant ?


A. go B. to go C. going D. goes


10. How about ... to Dong Trai market ?


A. going B. go C. goes D. to go


<i><b>IV- Match a place in column A with what you can see in column B. (1,5 points)</b></i>


<b>A</b> <b>Match</b> <b>B</b>


1. Sapa 1 + ... A. Oceanic Institute.


2. Nha Trang 2 + ... B. Ben Thanh Maket.


3. Ho Chi Minh City. 3 + ... C. The temple of Literature


4. Hue 4 + ... D. Beautiful limestone islands


5. Ha Noi 5 + ... E. Tribal villages.


6. Ha Long Bay 6 + ... F. F. Ngo Mon Gate.


<b>V- Turn the following sentences into the passive forms. </b><i><b>(2 points)</b></i>
1. They speak English all over the world.


...


2. People cut the bottles into small pieces.


...
3. People use old car tires to make sandals.


...
4. People throw away billions of cans every year.


...
<b>4. Collecting the tests: (1)</b>


<b>5. Homework: (1)</b>
- Ask Ss to review.


Week Date of planning


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(162)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=162>

Class 8A
<b>Unit 12: a vacation abroad</b>


getting started - listen and read
<b>A The aims and requests</b>


<b>1. Objectives. </b>


- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to get on with the topic of traveling to
some famous places in the world such as: Canada, American, Britain.


<b>2. Teaching point: </b>


+ Structure: <i>Making an invitation, making a complaint ...</i>



+ Vocabulary: (<i>Names of coutries) </i>


- Ss train matching skill....
<b>3. Preparation</b>


<b>+Teacher: Text book, work book, picture, tape and cassette player, extra-board....</b>
<b>+Students: Text book, work book, school things, ....</b>


<b>B. Procedures.</b>


<b>1. Organization: (1 m)</b>


-Good morning! How are you? Who’s absent today?
<b>2. Checking up/Wam-up: (5-7</b>’)


Teacher’s activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1. Wam-up </b>


- Hold the class to play "Networks"


5 - Work in groups to find name
of countries in the World.
England
Thailand


Australia
<b>3. New lesson:</b>



Teacher’s activities T Ss’ activities


<b>* 1. Presentation</b>


- Ask Ss to look at the pictures in the text book.
- Make question.


+ Why do you know it is The United States of
America ?


- Give the right answers:


- Ask Ss to work in pairs to practice asking and
answering question:


+ Which country do you like to visit most ?
<i>Why ?</i>


6 - Work in pairs to match the
name of the countries in the
box with appropriate


pictures/flags.


- Explain the answers by
answering the T' s question.
Ss: Because I can see the Statue
<i>of Liberty.</i>


...


- Copy the right As:


a) The USA b) Australia
c) Thailand d) Britian


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(163)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=163>

<b>2. Practice</b>


- Make questions:


<i>a. Who are they in the picture ?</i>
<i>b. What are they doing ?</i>


<i>c. Can you guess what they are talking about ?</i>
- Present new words:


<i>+Include: bao gåm.</i>


<i>+The following evening: bi tèi h«m sau</i>
<i>+Unfortunately: thËt kh«ng may</i>


<i>+Pick up: đón ( pick SB up )</i>.


- Let Ss practice the dialogue in pairs.


- Ask Ss to complete Mrs Quyen' s scheldule.
- Ask Ss to give their answers.


- Correct Ss' answers, and give the right
answers.



<b>Date</b> <b>Mon 25</b> <b>Tue</b>
<b>26</b>
<b>Wed</b>
<b>27</b>
<b>Thu 28</b>
Schedule Coming
to San
Francisco
Going
out
Having
dinner
with
the
Smiths
Leaving
San
Francisco


- Conduct Ss to answer the questions (exercise
2)


- Ask Ss to ask and answer in front of the class.


<b>3. Production</b>


24


e) Canada f) Japan.
- Work in pairs to practice


asking and answering.


EX:


S1: Among those countries ,
<i>Which country do you like to</i>
<i>visit mos t?</i>


S2: I like to visit Britain.
S1: Why?


S2: Because I can see alot of
<i>ancient and famous royal</i>
<i>places and buildings there. </i>
- Look at "Listen and read" ,
and answer the questions.


<i>+ (They are Mrs. Smith and</i>
<i>Mrs. Quyen)</i>


<i>+ (They are talking on the</i>
<i>phone)</i>


<i>+ (They are talking about ....)</i>
- Read and copy new words


- Work in pairs to practice the
dialogue.


- Ask Ss to complete Mrs


Quyen' s scheldule. (P.113)
- Give answers


- Check and copy the right
answers.


- Work in pairs to answer the
questions.


* Ss' answers may be:


<i>a) No, they won t.Because they</i>’
<i>are coming on a tour, and their</i>
<i>accommodation included on</i>
<i>the ticket price. So they will</i>
<i>stay at the hotel.</i>


<i>b) No, he won t. He will have a</i>’
<i>business meeting in the</i>
<i>evening.</i>


<i>c) Mrs Smiths, her friend will</i>
<i>pick her up at the hotel.</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(164)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=164>

- Make questions:


+ What are the structures that you have
<i>learnt ?</i>


- Repeat the structures:


* Making an invitation:
<i>Would you like .... ?</i>
* Declining an invitation:
<i>That' s very kind of you, buts....</i>
* Acceping an invitation:


<i>I' d love to. ...</i>
* Making complant


<i>"Oh dear. He' s always working".</i>


- Let Ss make examples.


6


- Listen to the T and copy


- Make examples, use the
structures.


<b>4. Consolidation: (2 ms)</b>


- Ask the Ss to remember some famous places in the world.
<b>5. Homework: (1 m)</b>


- Learn the dialogue by hearted.


Week Date of planning


Period 74 Date of teaching



Class 8A


<b>Unit 12: a vacation abroad</b>
Speak+listen


<b>A The aims and requests</b>
<b>1. Objectives. </b>


- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to use the language in tourist
advertisement.


<b>2. Teaching point: </b>
- Structure: Review


- Vocabulary: <i>Rate per night, single, douple, room, facilities</i>...
- Ss train speaking skill.


<b> 3. Preparation</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(165)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=165>

<b>+Students: Text book, work book, school things, ....</b>
<b>B. Procedures.</b>


<b>1. Organization: (1 m )</b>


-Good morning! How are you? Who’s absent today?
<b>2. Checking up/Wam-up: (5-7</b>’)


Teacher’s activities T Ss’ activities



<b>1.Warm up</b>


- Hold the class to play "<i><b>Jumbled</b></i>
<i><b>Words</b></i>"


<i> Ewn Oryk</i>
<i>Awstignonh</i>
<i>Sol Ngaegel</i>
<i>Oachcig</i>


....


5 - Work in small groups to play "<i><b>Jumbled</b></i>
<i><b>Words</b></i>" about famous places or cities in
America.


Answers<i>:</i>
<i>New York</i>
<i>Washington</i>
<i>Los Angeles</i>


<i>Chicago</i>.


<b>3. New lesson:</b>


Teacher’s activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1. Speaking </b>
<b>1.1 Pre-speaking</b>



- Ask Ss to look at brochures and
flight information (P.114).


- Present new words.


<i>+Via: ®i qua</i>


<i>+Rate per night : giá phòng/ đêm</i>
<i>+Single /double room: phịng đơn /</i>
<i>đơi</i>


<i>+Facilities: c¬ sở vật chất</i>
<i>+Gym: Phòng tập thể dục</i>


<i>+Business center: Trung tâm hội nghị</i>
<i>thơng mại.</i>


<b>1.2 While-speaking</b>


- Conduct Ss to complete their
itinerary.


- Make example.


A: <i>Where shall we stay ?</i>


B: <i>The Reverse Hotel is expensive but</i>


<i>it has a gym.</i>



A: <i>What time should we leave Los</i>
<i>Angeles ?</i>


B: <i>There' s daily flight at 10 am.</i>


<i>Would that be OK</i> ?


6


8


- Copy and learn new words.


- Work in pairs, use the information in
the brochures about the hotels and flights
to complete the itinerary.


- Read the itinirary aloud.
* Ss' dialogue may be:
A: Where shall we stay ?


B: We’ll stay at Atlantic Hotel. The price
<i>is reasonable and it also have a</i>
<i>swimming pool.</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(166)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=166>

- Ask Ss to write the itinerary in pair.
And write on the BB.


- Hang picture on BB



<b>1.3 Post-speaking</b>


- Ask Ss to work in groups and write
the tourist advertisement, then the
scheledue to these advertisements.


<b>2. Listening</b>
<b>2.1 Pre-listening</b>


- Hold the class to practice asking
and answering about the weather:


- Let Ss scan the words and tables of
<b>Listen (P.115)</b>


<b>2.2 While-listening</b>


- Conduct Ss to listen to the tape to
complete the table with the weather
information about some big cities in
the world.


- Play the tape Listen P.115 (3 times)
6


8


<i>?</i>


B: <i>The flight will depart at 14.00 on</i>


<i>Monday and we' ll arrive in Boston at</i>
<i>18.00. As scheduled, we’ll leave Boston</i>
<i>on Thursday.</i>


A: <i>What are we going to do then ?</i>


B: <i>We’ll visit Boston University, Art</i>
<i>galleries and eat sea food</i>.


- Work in groups to write the tourist
advertisement, then the scheledue to
these advertisements.


Examples:


Hong Ngoc Hotel.
Tel: 04.5657432.
Fax:04.5658907


Rate per night : 100-120 VND, single
150-180VNd, douple.


Facilities :Restaurant, swimming pool, sauna


- Work in groups to ask and answer:
Examples:


<i>+ What' s weather like today ?</i>
<i>- It' s...</i>



<i>+ What' s the weather like in Spring /</i>
<i>Summer / Fall / Winter in Viet Nam ?</i>
<i>- It' s...</i>


<i>- It' s...</i>


<i>+ Which season do you like best ? Why ?</i>
<i>- I like .... weather, because ....</i>


- Work individualy to scan the words and
tables of Listen (P.115)


- Prepare to listen to the tape, and
complete the table.


Note: The information includes weather
characteristics and the details of
temperature in the cities.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(167)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=167>

- Ask Ss to give their answers in front
of the class.


- Write Ss' s answers on BB.


- Play the tape again once to correct
Ss' answers.


<b>2.3 Post-listening</b>


- Give the extra board that is about


the weather in some cities:


+ Hanoi today will be dry and windy ,
with a low of fifteen and a high of
twenty two.


+ Ho Chi Minh will be a dry day
today, and warm. For the temperature,
the low will be twenty, and the high
will be twenty six degree.


- Ask Ss to read their writing in front
of the class.


5


5


- Look at the BB.


- Listen to the tape again, and check
answers.


* The right As:


<b>City</b> <b>Weather</b> <b>Temperature</b>
<b>Low</b> <b>High</b>


1. Sydney Dry, windy 23 26



2. Tokyo Dry, windy 15 22


3. London Humid,


cold


-3 7


4. Bangkok Warm, dty 24 32


5. New


York


Windy,
cloudy


8 15


6. Paris Cold, dry 10 16


- Look at the T' s examples, then write
the weather forcast about some big cities.
- Check As with friends.


- Read aloud


<b>4. Consolidation: (1)</b>


- Ask Ss to repeat the main contents of the lesson


<b>5. Home work: (1)</b>


- Ask Ss to make a dialogue about the schedule of the tour.


Week Date of planning


Period 75 Date of teaching


Class 8A


<b>Unit 12: a vacation abroad</b>
read


<b>A The aims and requests</b>
<b>1. Objectives.</b>


- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be provided more informations of some famous
places in Amarica: (Hawaii, New york, Chicago, Mouth Rushmore, San
Francisco...


<b>2. Teaching point: </b>


+ Structure: The past progressive tense


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(168)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=168>

- Ss train reading comprehension skill.
<b>3. Preparation</b>


<b>+Teacher: Text book, work book, tape and cassette player, ...</b>
<b>+Students: Text book, work book, school things, ....</b>



<b>B. Procedures.</b>
<b>1. Organization: (1 )</b>


-Good morning! How are you? Who’s absent today?
<b>2. Checking up/ Warm up: (5-7</b>’)


Teacher’s activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1.Checking up </b>


- Ask Ss to talk about the weather
forcast today.


<b>2.Warm up</b>


- Make questions:


<i>+ Do you remember Mrs.Quyen ?</i>
<i>+ What plan did she have ?</i>


3


4 - Work in groups to answer the T' s
questions.


<b>3. New lesson:</b>


Teacher’s activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1. Pre-reading</b>



- Ask Ss to look at the pictures
(P.116-117) and predict which places
Mrs.Quyen and her husband visited.
- Introduce the topic of the reading and
then present some new words and
phrases.


<i>+Lava: dung nham</i>


<i>+Pour out: tu«n trào ,phun</i>


<i>+Fishermans Wharf : Bến cảng Ng phủ</i>
<i>+Napa Valley: Thung lũng Napa</i>


<i> +Carve: chạm khắc</i>


<i>+"The windy city": thành phố léng giã</i>
<i>+On the shore of : ... trªn bê</i>


<i>+The Empire State Building: Cao èc</i>
<i>Empire State.</i>


<b>- Present the past progressive tense</b>.


<b>* Forms:</b>


I / He / She / It + was + Verb-ing
We / You / they + were



* Uses: The past progressive is used for
<i>past actions which began before that</i>
<i>time and probably continued after it.</i>


<b>2. While-reading</b>


8


- Work in groups to guess.


- Listen to the T.


- Copy and practice reading new words
and phrases.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(169)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=169>

- Let Ss scan the cards.


- Play the tape (once or twice)
- Ask Ss to do exercise 1 (P117)


- Call Ss to read answers aloud in front
of the class.


- Correct Ss' answers, then give the right
answers.


-Ask Ss to read the cards again and
answer the questions in Exercise 2.


- Call some pairs to practice in front of


the class.


- Give the correct As:


<i>a) She took a small plane to Kilauea</i>
<i>Volcano.</i>


<i>b) She went there by plane.</i>


<i>c) She saw the famous prison on the</i>
<i>island of Alcatraz in the middle of San</i>
<i>Francisco Bay .</i>


<i>d) It is amout where the heads of four</i>
<i>American presidents are carved into the</i>
<i>rock. </i>


<i>e) The other name of Chicago is the</i>
<i>The Windy City .</i>


“ ”


<i>f) She went shopping. </i>


<b>3. Post-reading</b>


- Ask Ss to list the famous places that are
mentioned in the reading.


21



- Work individualy to scan the cards.
- Listen to the tape.


- Write what Mrs.Quyen did and saw in
each of these places .


- Give answers.


- Check and copy the right ansswers.
* The answers:


<b>Place</b> <b>What she did and saw</b>
<b>a) Hawaii</b> <i>Went shopping, visited</i>


<i>Kilauea Volcano.</i>


<b>b) New york</b> <i>Went shopping, bought<sub>alot of souvernirs</sub></i>
<b>c) Chicago</b> <i>Saw lake Michigan</i>


<b>d) Mount </b>
<b>Rushmore</b>


<i> Saw the heads of four</i>
<i>American presidents.</i>


<b>e) </b>


<b>Sanfrancisco</b>



<i>Visited Fisher man s</i>‘
<i>Wharf, the napa Valley,</i>
<i>wine growing area and</i>
<i>the Alcatraz prison</i>
- Work in pairs to ask and answer.
- Pracice in front of the class.
- Copy the As.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(170)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=170>

6
<b>4. Consolidation: (1)</b>


- T reminds Ss to remember the main content of the reading.


<b>5. Homework:</b> (1)


- Ask Ss to learn by heart places in America that they' ve learnt.


Week Date of planning


Period 76 Date of teaching


Class 8A


<b>Correcting the Test</b>
<b>Time: 45 minutes</b>
<b>A The aims and requests</b>


<b>1. Objectives. </b>


- Help Ss check their result of the test. By the end of the lesson Ss will know


what they need to improve in the future.


<b>2. Teaching point: </b>


Listen and complete the letter. Read the passage about Ha Long Bay, answer
and check T or F statements. Passive forms, requests, .... Vocabulary from Unit
9 to Unit 12. Change sentences into passive.


- Ss check their skills on listening, reading and writing by doing exercises.
<b>3. Preparation</b>


<b>+Teacher: Teaching plan,....</b>
<b>+Students: School things,....</b>
<b>B. Procedures.</b>


<b>1. Organization: (1)</b>


-Good morning! How are you? Who’s absent today?
<b>2. Checking up/Warm up: </b>


<b> 3. New lesson:</b>


Teacher’s activities T Ss’ activities


- Give paper of the test to Ss (if the T has
finished marking)


- Read the text letter (three times).
<i><b>Tape Transcript:</b></i>



Dear Mai,


We are having a wonderful time in Hue.
The people are friendly and the weather has
been warm and sunny.


10 <b><sub>I- Listen and complete the</sub></b>
<b>letter. </b><i>(5 ms)</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(171)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=171>

In Hue, I visited Ngo Mon Gate with
Nam and his sister Lan. It was nice to see
them.


I bought lots of souvenirs for you. Lan is
always complaning about the heaviness of
my suitcase.


See you soon.
Love
Hoa


- Ask Ss to give their As


- Correct Ss' As and then give the right As.


- Let Ss work in groups to read the passage
and check the sentences.


- Explain words or phrases that Ss don't
remember.



- Correct Ss' answers and give the right As.
- Ask Ss to give their answer


- Explain the forms and uses of choosing
words and phrases


- Ask Ss to give their As.


- Explain structures that Ss don't remember.
- Repeat the given sentences.


1. They speak English all over the world.
2. People cut the bottles into small pieces.
3. People use old car tires to make sandals
4. People throw away billions of cans every


6


6


6


8


- Check and copy the right As:
(1) in (2) sunny (3) Ngo
Mon Gate (4) his (5) for
(6) of (7) soon



<b>II- Read the passage then</b>
<b>check () the box. (8 ms)</b>


- Work in groups to read the
passage and do exercise.


- Give answers.
- Check and copy:


1- T 2- F 3- T
4- T 5- F


* Answers:


<i>1) There are 1,969 islands</i>
<i>2) Yes, it was.</i>


<b>III. Choose .... </b><i>(6 ms)</i>


- Process as exercise II above.
Answers:


1 - D 2 - A 3 - B
4 - B


5 - A 6 - C 7 - B
8 - A


9 - B 10 - a
<b>IV- Match .... </b><i>(6 ms)</i>



- Give answers in front of the
class.


*Answer key:


1 + E 2 + A 3 + B
4 + F


5 + C 6 + D


<b>V- Write to complete</b>
<b>sentences. </b><i>(14 ms)</i>


Right sentences.


1. El is spoken all over the
world.


2. The bottles are cut into small
pieces.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(172)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=172>

year. tires.


4. Billions of cans are thrown
away every years.


<b>4.Consolidation : (4 )</b>


- T ask Ss to repeat some grammar structures that are used in the test.



<b>5. Homework: (1 )</b>


- Ss do exercises again
- Prepare the next lesson.


Week Date of planning


Period 77 Date of teaching


Class 8A


<b>Unit 12: a vacation abroad</b>
<b> writing</b>


<b>A The aims and requests</b>
<b>1. Objectives. </b>


- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to write a postcard. And how to use
the words on a postcards.


<b>2. Teaching point: </b>
+ Structure: <i>Review </i>
+ Vocabulary: Review


- Ss train writing notes on a postcard.
<b>3. Preparation</b>


<b>+Teacher: Text book, work book, </b>extra board ...
<b>+Students: Text book, work book, school things, ....</b>


<b>B. Procedures.</b>


<b>1. Organization: (1)</b>


-Good morning! How are you? Who’s absent today?
<b>2. Checking up/ Warm - up: (5-7</b>’)


Teacher’s activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1.Checking up </b>


- Ask Ss to one or two of Mrs.Quyen' s
postcards.


<b>2.Warm – up</b>


- Ask Ss to list things they often do when
visit famous places:


3


4


- Work in pairs to discuss and write
sentences on the BB.


EX:


<i>Sight seeing.</i>
<i>Take photographs.</i>



<i>Buy post cards to send to friends.</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(173)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=173>

Teacher’s activities T Ss’ activities
<b>1. Pre-writing</b>


- Make questions:


<i>a. Do you usually send postcards to your</i>
<i>friends or relatives ?</i>


<i>b. What do your write on the postcards ?</i>
- Introduce the lesson.


- Ask Ss to look at the first postcard that
Mrs Quyen sent from the USA.


- Ask Ss to give their answers in front of
the class.


- Give the right answers.
<i>Dear Sally,</i>


<i>We are having a wonderful time <b>in</b> the</i>
<i>USA. The <b>people</b> are friendly and the</i>


<i><b>weather</b> has been warm and sunny.</i>
<i>In San francisco,I <b>visited</b> my friends,</i>
<i>Sandra Smith and <b>her</b> family. It was <b>nice</b></i>



<i>to see them.</i>


<i>I <b>bought</b> lots of souvenirs <b>for</b> the</i>
<i>childen. Thanh is always complaining</i>
<i>about the <b>heaviness</b> of my suitcase.</i>
<i>See you <b>soon.</b></i>


<i>Love ,</i>
<i>Quyen</i>


<b>2.While-writing</b>


-Ask Ss to write a postcard to a friend
about his/her trip.


- Ask some Ss to read their postcard
aloud in front of the class.


- Give suggested postcard (on the
extra-board)


<i>Dear Nam, </i>


<i>I am having a wonderful time in Ha</i>
<i>long Bay. The people here are very</i>
<i>friendly. We re lucky, The weather has</i>‘
<i>been fine and sunny during the trip.</i>
<i>I saw alot of caves here . They</i>


<b>3. Post-writing</b>



- Ask Ss to correct their postcard and
read.


9


20


6


- Answer the Qs (in El or
Vietnamese)


- Listen to the T


- Work in groups to read the post
card and fill in the missing words.
- Read answers alouds. (Read the
postcard).


- Check and copy.


- Work individualy to imagine to be
a tourist on a vacation in a certain
place in Viet nam. Write a postcard
to a friend about the trip. Read the
information in the text book for
help.( the place , the people, the
weather, the famous places, and
presents for relatives.



- Read the postcard aloud


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(174)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=174>

aloud in front of the class.
4. Consolidation: (1)


- T reminds Ss to remember the main form of a postcard.
<b>5. Home work: (1)</b>


- T asks Ss to write a post card to send to a friend.


Week Date of planning


Period 78 Date of teaching


Class 8A


LANGUAGE FOCUS
<b>A The aims and requests</b>


<b>1. Objectives. </b>


- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to review and practice the structures
that they have learned.


<b>2. Teaching point: </b>
- New structures.


- Pratice doing exercises.
<b>3. Preparation</b>



<b>+Teacher: Text book, work book, picture, </b>


<b>+Students: Text book, work book, school things, ....</b>
<b>B. Procedures.</b>


<b>1. Organization: (1 m)</b>


-Good morning! How are you? Who’s absent today?
<b>2. Checking up: </b>


<b>3. New lesson:</b>


Teacher’s activities t Ss’s activities


<b>4. Consolidation:</b>
<b>5. Home work:</b>


Week Date of planning


Period 79 Date of teaching


Class 8A


<b>Unit 13: festivals</b>


<b> getting started - listen and read</b>
<b>A The aims and requests</b>


<b>1. Objectives. </b>



- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to get on with the new topic
(festivals) like : <i>rice- cooking festival, fire- making contest, Water- fetching</i>
<i>contest</i>...,


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(175)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=175>

+ Structure: <i>Compund adjectives.</i>


+ Vocabulary: <i>Bub, husk, bamboo, ...</i>


- Ss train group discussion skill....
<b>3. Preparation</b>


<b>+Teacher: Text book, work book, </b>picture, tape and cassette player,....
<b>+Students: Text book, work book, school things, ....</b>


<b>B. Procedures.</b>


<b>1. Organization: (1 m)</b>


-Good morning! How are you? Who’s absent today?
<b>2. Checking up/Warm-up: (5-7</b>’)


Teacher’s activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1.Warm-up</b>


- Hold the class to work in groups to give
opinion: "<i>Where should these people go</i>
<i>on their visits to Viet Nam ?" Why</i> ?



- Ask some groups to give their opinion.
- Give suggested answers:


<i>1. Tom should go to Do Son, Sam Son or</i>
<i>Nha Trang....</i>


<i>2. David should go to ancient city of Hue</i>
<i>or the old streets in Ha Noi.</i>


<i>3. Huckleberry should go to Sa Pa or</i>
<i>Yen Tu Mountain.</i>


<i>4. Oliver should go to traditional pottery</i>
<i>villages like Bat Trang pottery village in</i>
<i>Ha Noi or some village in Binh Duong.</i>


<i>5. Robinson should go to HCM City</i>.


7


- Work in groups to give opinion:
"Where should these people go on
<i>their visits to Viet Nam ?" (Look at</i>
Getting Started)


- Talk in front of the class.


<b>3. New lesson:</b>


Teacher’s activities T Ss’ activities



<b>* 1. Presentation</b>


- Ask Ss to look at <i>Listen and Read</i>


(P.121).


- Hang picture on BB, and present
some traditional festivals in VN and
new words:


<i>+Rice - cooking festival: héi nÊu c¬m</i>
<i>+Water - fetching festival: héi thi lÊy </i>
<i>n-íc.</i>


9 - Look at the T' s suggestion
- Look at the picture, and answer :


<i>+ Who are they in the picture ?</i>


<i>+ What are they diong</i> ?


- Listen to the T and copy.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(176)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=176>

<i>+Fire-making: héi thi nhãm löa</i>
<i>+Starting possition: điểm xuất phát.</i>
<i>+Yell: la hét, cổ vũ</i>


<i>+Rub : chà, cä x¸t</i>
<i>+Husk : vá trÊu.</i>



- Play the tape (Listen and Read)
- Ask Ss to read the dialogue.
<b>2.Practice</b>


- Ask Ss to do exercise 2 (P.122), check
() the boxes are true or false.


- Ask Ss to give their As.


- Correct and give the right As.
<i>a) F. (Only <b>one</b> team member ....)</i>
<i>b) F. (... collect <b>one</b> bottle)</i>


<i>c) T</i>


<i>d) F. (Pieces of <b>bamboo</b> ....)</i>
<i>e) F. (... <b>the judges</b> taste...)</i>
<i>f) T.</i>


- Explain compound - adjectives:


+ Form: <i><b>Compound adjective = noun </b></i>
<i><b>+ V-ing.</b></i>


<i>A rice- cooking festival</i>


<i>A </i> <i> water- fetching</i>


<i>competition.</i>



<i>A fire- matching </i>


<i>Article) (noun ) (verb-ing)</i>
<i>( noun)</i>


<i>Compound adjective</i>
+ Use to form a compound noun.


<b>3. Production</b>


- Ask Ss to work in groups to list the
festivals in Vietnam.


17


7


- Listen to the tape.


- Some pairs read the dialogue in
front of the class.


- Work in small groups to do exercise.
- Give answers in front of the class.


- Copy the new grammar, and then
make examples.


EX: <i>A story - telling competition: </i>


<i>cc thi kĨ chun</i>


...


- Work in groups to list the festivals
in Vietnam.


EX:


<i>+ Spring festival: héi xu©n</i>
<i>+ Village festival: hội làng</i>


<i>+ Dong Da festival: lễ hội Đống</i>
<i>Da</i>


<i>+ Lim festival: héi Lim</i>


...
<b>4. Consolidation: (2)</b>


- Ask the Ss to retell and remember some traditional festivals in Vietnam.
<b>5. Homework: (1)</b>


- Write to tell one traditional fetival.


Week Date of planning


Period 80 Date of teaching


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(177)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=177>

<b>Unit 13: festivals</b>


speak


<b>A The aims and requests</b>
<b>1. Objectives. </b>


- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know how to prepare for Tet
holiday and some great festivals in Vietnam :


<b>2. Teaching point: </b>
- Structure: Review


- Vocabulary: (names of festivals)


- Ss train speaking skill by making dialogues
<b>3. Preparation</b>


<b>+Teacher: Text book, work book, extra-board ...</b>
<b>+Students: Text book, work book, school things, ....</b>
<b>B. Procedures.</b>


<b>1. Organization: (1)</b>


-Good morning! How are you? Who’s absent today?
<b>2. Checking up: (5-7</b>’)


Teacher’s activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1.Checking up</b>


- Ask Ss to retell 3 festivals of the last lesson.


<b>2. Warm up</b>


- Hold the class to play "Activities
Classification" by giving acivities to prepare
for Tet.


<i>Clean / decorate the house, hang pictures,</i>
<i>remove old wallpapers</i> ....


<i>Buy cakes, jams</i> ...


2
5


- Work in small groups to play
separate the activities.


<b>3. New lesson:</b>


Teacher’s activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1. Pre-speaking</b>
- Make questions:


a.<i> What do you usually do before Tet ?</i>


<i>b.What is the most important to prepare for</i>
<i>Tet</i> ?


- Ask Ss to read the dialogue between


Mrs.Quyen and Lan , and put the sentences
in the correct order.


- Give the new words


<i>+Pomegranates: quả lựu</i>
<i>+Sweetie: con yêu.</i>


8


- Work in groups to answer the T' s
questions.


- Work in pairs to rearrange the
sentences to make a complete
dialogue.


- Give answer in front of the class.
* The correct orders are:


A  F  C  H  D  J 


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(178)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=178>

<b>2. While-speaking</b>


- Ask Ss to practice speaking about the
work they’ll do for Tet.


- Call some pairs to speak in front of the
class.



- Ask Ss to practice talking about preparing
for the festivals.


<b>3. Post-speaking</b>


- Ask Ss to practice talking about preparing
for other festivals


+ A village festival
+ A school festival
+ A spring festival
+ A harvest festival
+ A flower festival


- Give suggested answer on extra-board


16


10


- Work in pairs to practice speaking
about works will do for Tet.


- Work in groups to practice talking
about preparing for other festivals,
use the list (P.123)


Example: A school festival


<i>- Decorate our classroom.</i>


<i>- Clean the windows.</i>


<i>- Cover the teacher’s table with</i>
<i>the plastic towel.</i>


<i>- Everyone is ready for the sport</i>
<i>activities and cultural activities</i>
<i>organized on Saturday. </i>


<i>- Buy flowers for the meeting. </i>
- Call some pairs to speaking aloud
in front of the class.


<b>4. Consolidation: (1)</b>


- Ask Ss to repeat and remember activities to prepare for festivals in Viet nam.
<b>5. Home work: (1)</b>


- Ask Ss to practice talking about some festivals.


Week Date of planning


Period 81 Date of teaching


Class 8A


<b>Unit 13: festivals</b>
listen


<b>A The aims and requests</b>


<b>1. Objectives.</b>


- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to make preparation for Tet
<b>2. Teaching point: </b>


+ Structure: <i>Review.</i>


+ Vocabulary: <i>Tidy the rooms, peach blossom, a bunch of flower, marigold,</i>
<i>spring rolls</i>...


- Ss train listening comprehension skill..
<b>3. Preparation</b>


<b>+Teacher: Text book, tape and cassette player,....</b>
<b>+Students: Text book, work book, school things,....</b>
<b>B. Procedures.</b>


<b>1. Organization: (1)</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(179)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=179>

<b>2. Checking up/ Warm up: (5-7</b>’)


Teacher’s activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1. Checking up</b>


- T ask Ss to tell about one festival
<b>2.Warm up</b>


- Hold the class to plat "<i><b>Networks</b></i>" about
things on Tet holiday.



3


4 <sub>- Work in groups to play </sub>
<b>3. New lesson:</b>


Teacher’s activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1. Pre-listening</b>


- Make suggested questions:


<i>a. What kinds of food do we have to prepare for</i>
<i>Tet ? </i>


<i>b. What kinds of fruits do we have to prepare for</i>
<i>Tet ?</i>


<i>c. What kinds of flowers do we have to buy</i> ?


- Give suggested As:


<b>Food: </b><i>Chung cake, candies, dried watwrmelon</i>
<i>seeds (h¹t da), jam (møt) ....</i>


<b>Fruits:</b><i> Bananas, grapefruits ....</i>


<b>Flowers:</b> <i>Peach blossoms (hoa đào), apricot</i>
<i>blossoms (hoa mai), marigold (cúc vạn thọ),</i>
<i>violet (hoa vi ô lét) ...</i>



- Conduct Ss to listen to a conversation between
Mr and Mrs Robinson and Liz about their
preparation for Tet.


<b>2. While-listening</b>
- Play the tape (twice)


- Ask Ss to give their answers
- Give the right answers


a) <i>Mr.Robinson / flowers market</i>.


b) <i>traditional</i>


c) <i>dried watermelon seeds</i>.
d) <i>make</i>.


- Play the tape again, and conduct Ss to complete
"Things to do" note of the Robinson before Tet.
- Ask Ss to give their answers


- Play the tape again, then give the right answer.
<b>Mr Robinson</b><i>: Go to the market to buy peach</i>


10


13


- Work in groups to discuss


the T' s questions.


- Give opinion oin front of
the class.


- Copy ...


- Prepare to listen to the tape
and complete the sentences.
- Listen and do exercise.
- Give answer in front of the
class.


- Check and copy the right
answers.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(180)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=180>

<i>blossom and marygolds</i>.


<b>Liz</b><i>: Buy some candies anda paket of dried water</i>


<i>melon seeds.</i>


<b>Mrs Robinson: </b><i>Learn how to make spring rolls</i>.
<b>3. Post-listening</b>


- Let Ss practice talking about preparations for


Tet. 10


- Give answers



- Check and copy the right
As.


- Practice to talk.
<b>4. Consolidation: (1)</b>


- Retell the main content of the lesson: How to prepare for Tet.
<b>5. Home work: (1)</b>


- Ask Ss to do exercise 2 in the work book


Week Date of planning


Period 82 Date of teaching


Class 8A


<b>Unit 13: festivals</b>
reading


<b>A The aims and requests</b>
<b>1. Objectives.</b>


- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know more about some the festival
in the world. (The Christmas) .


<b>2. Teaching point: </b>
+ Structure: <i>Review</i>



+ Vocabulary: Chistmas tree, Christmas cards, Christmas Carols, Santa Claus,
<i>Patron Saint, Design, Spread.</i>


- Ss train reading comprehension skill.
<b>3. Preparation</b>


<b>+Teacher: Text book, work book, tape and cassette player, ...</b>
<b>+Students: Text book, work book, school things, ....</b>


<b>B. Procedures.</b>


<b>1. Organization: (1 m)</b>


-Good morning! How are you? Who’s absent today?
<b>2. Checking up/Warm up: (5-7</b>’)


Teacher’s activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1.Checking up </b>


- Ask Ss to tell preparations for Tet
<b>2.Warm up</b>


- Hold the class to play "Guessing Game"
about Noel festival.


1st<sub> clue; This is the biggest festival in the</sub>
3


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(181)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=181>

western countries.



2nd<sub>clue: People often decorate a tree and</sub>
exchange the best wishes by giving cards
to others.


3rd<sub> clue: It is on December 25.</sub>


* Ss' s answer may be:
<i><b>Christmas</b></i> .


<b>3. New lesson:</b>


Teacher’s activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1. Pre-reading</b>


- Introduce the topic of the lesson and
ask Ss to give some things they know
about the Christmas.


- Present new words:


<i>+Chistmas tree- cây thông Noel</i>
<i>+Christmas cards- thiếp mừng Noel</i>
<i>+Christmas Carols- những bài Thánh</i>
<i>ca Giáng sinh</i>


<i>+Santa Claus- ụng gi Noel</i>
<i>+Patron Saint- thánh đỡ đầu</i>



<i>+Have sb do smt : yờu cu ai ú lm</i>
<i>gỡ.</i>


<i>+Unsuitable: Không trở lại</i>
<i>+Popular again: Phổ biÕn trë l¹i</i>


<i>+Fat jolly man:Ngời đàn ơng mập</i>
<i>mạp, vui tính</i>.


<b>2. While-reading</b>


- Conduct Ss to read the texts and
complete the table about the history ....
- Ask Ss to give the right answers.


8


21


- Listen to the T and list the things
about the Christmas.


- Read and copy new words and
phrases


- Read the text and complete the table
about the history and origins of some
Christmas specials ....


- Give the answers.


<i><b>Christmas</b></i>


<i><b>Specials</b></i>


<i><b>Place of</b></i>


<i><b>origin</b></i> <i><b>Date.</b></i>


<i>The</i>


<i>Christmas</i>
<i>Tree</i>


Rige Early


1500s
The


Christmas
Card


England Mid-19th
century
Christmas


Carols


No


information



800 years
ago


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(182)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=182>

- Ask Ss to read the reading the texts
again and then answer the questions in
the text book.


- Ask some pairs to pracice in front of
the class.


<b>3. Post-reading</b>


- Ask some Ss to read the texts aloud in
front of the class.


- Correct Ss' pronunciation if
necessary.


6


- Work in pairs and answer the
questions.


- Practice in front of the class.
* Ss' s answers may be:


<i>a) More than a century ago.</i>


<i>b) He wanted to send Christmas</i>


<i>greetings to his friends.</i>


<i>c) 800 years ago.</i>


<i>d) An American professor Clement</i>
<i>Clarke Moore.</i>


<i>e) On the description of Saint</i>
<i>Nicholas in professor Moore s poem</i>’ .
- Read the texts aloud in front of the
class.


<b>4. Consolidation: (1 m)</b>


- Ss repeat and remember some basic things on Christmas.


<b>5. Home work:</b> (1 m)


- Ask Ss to write about history of the Christmas


Week Date of planning


Period 83 Date of teaching


Class 8A


<b>Unit 13: festivals</b>
writing


<b>A The aims and requests</b>


<b>1. Objectives. </b>


- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know more about some festivals
Vietnamese.


<b>2. Teaching point: </b>
+ Structure: <i>Review </i>


+ Vocabulary: Review the Rice- cooking festival, the Fire –<i>making fastival, the</i>
<i>Water- fetching festival .</i>


- Ss train writing to describe festivals.
<b>3. Preparation</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(183)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=183>

<b>1. Organization: (1)</b>


-Good morning! How are you? Who’s absent today?
<b>2. Checking up: (5-7</b>’’)


Teacher’s activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1.Checking up</b>


-Ask Ss to retell some informations about the
Christmas .


<b>2.Warm – up</b>


- Ask Ss to list traditional festivals in Vietnam
. And The things that relate to the Christmas.



2


5 - Work in groups to list


traditional festivals in


Vietnam . And The things that
relate to the Christmas.


Examples:


<i>Vietnamese traditional festival.</i>


+The rice - cooking festival.
+The fire - making festival.
+The Water- fetching festival.
+The spring festival.


+The village festival.
<b>3. New lesson:</b>


Teacher’s activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1. Pre-writing</b>


- Conduct Ss to use the information in the
dialogue on page 121 - 122 to fill in the gap.


- Ask Ss to read their completed report in


front of the class.


- Correct Ss' mistakes if necessary


<b>2. While-writing</b>


- Ask Ss to write the similar report on a
festival they enjoyed.


- Ask Ss to work in pairs to share the
answers with friends.


- Ask some Ss to read their writing in front of
9


20


- Work in groups to use the
information in the dialogue on
page 121 - 122 to fill in the gap
in the report (P.127).


- Give answers by reading
completed passage.


* The right As:


<i>1.rice- cooking festival. 2. one.</i>
<i>3.water- fetching. 4.run. </i>
<i>5.water. 6.traditional</i>


<i>7.bamboo. 8.six.</i>


<i>9.separate. 10.added</i>.
- Work individually to write the
similar report on a festival , use
the below notes.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(184)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=184>

the class.


- Give the suggested report (on extra-board).
<b>The mid- autumn festival.</b>


This report shows how the Mid- Autumn
festival was held in my neighborhood.


The Mid - autumn festival was held on the
15th<sub> of August (According to Lunar</sub>
Calendar)


This festival was speacially organized for
children.


<i><b>It was held in the yard of the Cultural</b></i>
<i><b>House in my village. The main festival</b></i>
<i><b>lasted about three hours when the Moon is</b></i>
<i><b>at its fullest. During the festival, children</b></i>
<i><b>took part in various activities like ; singing</b></i>
<i><b>and shouting, wearing masks, parading on</b></i>
<i><b>the roads and banging the dums.</b></i>



Beside, children ate a very special cake
called Moon Cakes.


I think this festival is a very special occasion
for Vietnamese people and for children to
play and enjoy on variety of activities.
Moreover, children would understand more
about Vietnamese traditions.


Notes:


<i>The mid- Autumn festival - TÕt Trung thu</i>


<i>Moon Cakes - B¸nh Trung thu</i>.


<b>3. Post-writing</b>


- Ask Ss to answer the questions about the
writing given.


a. What is the name of the festival?
<i>b. When is it held ?</i>


<i>c. Where is it organized ?</i>


<i>d. What do you think about the festival</i> ? 5


<i>Name; Place; Length;</i>
<i>Activities; How;</i>



<i>Comments</i>....


- Work in pairs to share the
answers with partners.


- Read answers aloud.


- Consult the T' s answers.


- Work in groups to discuss, use
the T's questions.


<b>4. Consolidation: (2)</b>


- T reminds Ss to remember the main form of a describing massage
<b>5. Home work: (1)</b>


- T asks Ss to write a festival that they have joined


Week Date of planning


Period 84 Date of teaching


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(185)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=185>

<b>LANGUAGE FOCUS</b>
<b>A The aims and requests</b>


<b>1. Objectives. </b>


- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to use Passive form ,compound words and
reported speech.



<b>2. Teaching point: </b>


-Passive form ,compound words and reported speech.
-Writing and speaking


<b>3. Preparation</b>


<b>+Teacher: Text book, work book, picture…</b>


<b>+2Students: Text book, work book, school things, ....</b>
<b>B. Procedures.</b>


<b>1. Organization: (1)</b>


-Good morning! How are you? Who’s absent today?
<b>2. Checking up: </b>


<b>3. New lesson:</b>


Teacher’s activities t Ss’ activities


<b>1. Passive form :</b>


Recall the way to change the active sentences
into passive


S + V + O .



S be + V O
<b>Example :</b>


Last night I saw her in the cinema


Last night She was seen in the cinema by
me


1 Asks Ss to complete the sentencses ,use the
passsive forms of the verbs in the box Decide
whether the time is past ,present or futurer
<b>Answer keys :</b>


a.were performed b. was decorated - put
c. was made


d. was held e. was awarded
f. was written


.


2. Asks Ss to complete the coversation ,use
the verbs in the box


Answer keys :


1 jumbled 2 broken 3. broken 4.


10



6


8


Ss listen and copy down the form
then give some examples


I write a book


A book is written by me


Work in individually to complete
the sentences ,use the passsive
forms of the verbs in the box
Decide whether the time is past
,present or futurer


.


Work inindividually to complete
the coversation ,use the verbs in
the box


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(186)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=186>

scatter 5 .pull


b- F c-E d- B e- D f- A
3 Asks Ss to rewrite the sentences ,use the
compound words :


Answer keys



a: It’s a fire - making contest
b: It’s a bull –fighting festival
c :It’s a cars-making industry
d: It;s a flower - arranging contest
e: Viet nam is a rice-exporting country
f: This is a clothes washing machine .
4. T says : yesterday Mrs Thu neeed a


plumer ,a man came to her door and asks Ss
to report what the man told


*Answer keys


He said he could fix the faucets
He said the pipes were broken


He said new pipes were very expensive
He saidI had to pay him then


6


6


Work in individually to report
what the man told


<b>4. Consolidation</b> 2’


- Sum up the content of the lesson.



<b>5. Homework</b> 1’
- Prepare for new part.


Week Date of planning


Period 85 Date of teaching


Class 8A


<b>Unit 14: wonders of the world</b>


<b> getting started - listen and read+language focus 3</b>
<b>A The aims and requests</b>


<b>1. Objectives. </b>


- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know more about Wonders of the
world.


<b>2. Teaching point: </b>
+ Structure: <i>Review.</i>


+ Vocabulary: The Sydney Opera House, The great Pyramids, The great Wall,
Stonehenge ....


- Ss train observing skill....
<b>3. Preparation</b>


<b>+Teacher: Text book, work book, tape and cassette player,....</b>


<b>+Students: Text book, work book, school things, ....</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(187)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=187>

<b>1. Organization: (1 m)</b>


-Good morning! How are you? Who’s absent today?
<b>2. Checking up/Warm-up : (5-7</b>’)


Teacher’s activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1.Warm-up</b>


- Hold the class to list names of Wonders,
that they know.


- Ask Ss to give their answers in front of the
class.


- Ask Ss to look at the pictures on page
131, and work in pairs to match the names
of these famous world landmarks to the
correct pictures.


- Help Ss to read the words.


(Explain more about these wonders and
other heritages in Viet nam or in the world)


7


- Work in groups to list names of


Wonders, (in English or Vietnamese)
EX:


<i>The Eiffel Tower. (Th¸p Ep phen) </i>
<i>The Great Wall of China (V¹n lý </i>
<i>tr-êng thµnh)</i>


- Work in pairs to match the names
of these famous world landmarks to
the correct pictures.


* The right As:


a) The pyramids. (Kim tù th¸p Ai
CËp)


b) Sydney Opera House. (Nhà hát ...)
c) Stonehenge. (Đài tởng niệm bằng
đá)


<b>3. New lesson:</b>


Teacher’s activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1. Presentation</b>


- Introduce topic of the lesson, and ask
Ss to listen to the tape and and answer:
<i>+ What is the name of the game in the</i>
<i>tape ?</i>



<i>+ How to play it ?</i>


- Play the tape, and explain the rule to
play the game.


<b>2. Practice</b>


- Ask Ss to read the dialogue in groups
of three.


- Ask some groups to read the dialogue
aloud .


- Ask Ss to read the dialogue again and
complete the summary by filling the
blank with the most suitable word.


- Ask Ss to give answers.


- Correct Ss' answers, and give the
right As.


(1) game (2) place (3) clue


(4) Vietnam (5) America. (6) Golden


8


18



- Listen to the tape and answer the Qs.


<i>+ Guessing game</i>.


- Work in groups of three to practice
reading the dialogue.


- Read the dialogue aloud in front of the
class.


- Work in small groups to read the
dialogue again and complete the
summary by filling the blank with the
most suitable word.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(188)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=188>

(7) right (8) was


<b>3. Production</b>


- Hold the class to play the guessing
game. Use picture of Ha Long, Sa Pa ...


8


- Check and copy the right As.


- Think of the famous places in VN, and
make questions



Note:


Only use Yes- No questions and the T
only says “Yes” if the answer is right,
“ No “ if the answer is wrong.


EX: Is it in the north ? / South ? ....


4. Consolidation: (2)


- Ask the Ss to retell names of wonders in the lesson.
<b>5. Homework: (1)</b>


- Write the name of the world heritages.


- Do exercise 1 on page 136 (Language focus)


<b>Week</b> Date of planning


<b>Period</b> <b>86</b> Date of teaching


Class 8A


<b>Unit 14: wonders of the world</b>
Speak+language 2


<b>A The aims and requests</b>
<b>1. Objectives. </b>


- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to understand more about some world


heritages


<b>2. Teaching point: </b>


- Structure: <i>Indirect speech</i>


- Ss train reported information skill.
<b>3. Preparation</b>


<b>+Teacher: Text book, work book, </b>extra-board ...
<b>+Students: Text book, work book, school things, ....</b>
<b>B. Procedures.</b>


<b>1. Organization: (1)</b>


-Good morning! How are you? Who’s absent today?
<b>2. Checking up: (5-7</b>’)


Teacher’s activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1.Checking up </b>


- Ask Ss to correct their homework on BB.
*Key: <i>a) was completed b) was </i>


<i>constructed c) was designed</i>


<i>d) was presented e) was presented</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(189)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=189>

<b>2.Warm up</b>



- Hold the class to play "Networks" about


famous places . 4


- Work in small groups to list famous
places


The Great Wall.


Ha long Bay.
EX:


<i>The Great Pyramids.</i>
<i>The Big Ben Tower.</i>


<i>The Petronas Twin Tower.</i>
<i>Eiffel Tower.</i>


Hue Citadel.


<b>3. New lesson:</b>


Teacher’s activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1. Pre-speaking</b>


- Ask Ss to look at 10 fomous places on
page 133 and tell the places that they
know.



- Give informations about the 10 places.
(write on the extra-board)


1. It was regconized as a World Heritage
in 2003.


2. It was constructed in Paris in 1889 in
the 100th <sub>celebration of French</sub>


Revolution.


3. It was built more than 2000 years ago
with the length of 4500 miles and it is the
only man made structure that can be seen
from the space.


4. It’s one of the World Heritages of
Vietnam. It consists of nearly 2000
islands with magnificient caves.


5. It is the great Clock in London which
gives the GMT (Greenwich Mean Time).


6. It is the skyscraper in New York. It was
constructed in 1930 with 102 stories.


7. It is the highest mountain in the world
located in Nepal. It is 8848 meters high
and was named after the man who first


reach to the peak of the mountain.


8. The city is famous for Huong River
and Bai Tho Mountain.


9. The highest building, located in
Malaysia.


12 - Work in groups to look at 10
fomous places on page 133 and tell
the places .


- Look at the informations on the
extra-board and match it with a
suitable place.


- Work individually to make Yes/No
questions about above places.


EX:


<b>Questions</b> <b>Yes No</b>


Is Phong Nha Cave in
Southern VN ?



Famous


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(190)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=190>

10. It' s the world' s first coral reefs


occurred about 500 million years ago in
Southern Europe.


- Conduct Ss to make Yes/No questions
about above places.


<b>2. While-speaking</b>


- Introduce indirect questions.


<b>Direct:</b>


<i>I said to / asked Hoa: Is Eiffel Tower</i>“
<i>in Germany?”</i>


<b>Indirect:</b>


<i>I asked Hoa if / whether Eiffel Tower was</i>
<i>in Germany.</i>


<b>[S + V-ed + O if/whether S + V + O]</b>


If / whether : xem lµ


- Ask Ss to do exercise 2 (report the
activity)


<b>3. Post-speaking</b>


- Ask Ss to use the indirect questions to


practice speaking about the world
heritages.


14


9


Does Big Ben give
GMS ?



....


- Listen to the T and copy


- Work in groups to report the
activities that have done.


- Use the indirect questions to
practice speaking about the world
heritages.


<i>Eg: I asked Hoa If Phong Nha Cave</i>
<i>was in the Southern Vietnam, She</i>
<i>said that It wasn’t .</i>


4. Consolidation: (1)


- Ask Ss to repeat and remember indirect wih "if / whether"
<b>5. Home work: (1)</b>



- Ask Ss to do exercise 2 on page 136 (Language forcus)


Week Date of planning


Period 87 Date of teaching


Class 8A


<b>Unit 14: wonders of the world</b>
Listen+language focus 4
<b>A The aims and requests</b>


<b>1. Objectives.</b>


- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know more about the world
heritage: Great Barrier Reef, and know how to use the words in advertisements.
<b>2. Teaching point: </b>


+ Structure: <i>Review.</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(191)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=191>

- Ss train listening skill on finding mistakes.
<b>3. Preparation</b>


<b>+Teacher: Text book, tape and cassette player,....</b>
<b>+Students: Text book, work book, school things,....</b>
<b>B. Procedures. </b>


<b>1. Organization: (1)</b>



-Good morning! How are you? Who’s absent today?
<b>2. Checking up/Warm up: (18)</b>


Teacher’s activities T Ss activities


<b>1.15-minute test.</b>


<i>Chuyển những câu sau sang gián tiếp.</i>


1) The mother said to her son: "Are you
hungry ?"


 The mother asked ....


2) The boy said to the girl" "Can I go with you to
school ?"


<sub> The boy asked ...</sub>


3) Is Ha Long Bay in Quang Ninh provine ?


 The tourist asked ....


4) Is it far from Ha Noi ?


 The tourist asked ....


5) Is the Big Ben in London ?


<sub> Nam asked Mai ...</sub>



<b>2.Warm up</b>


- Hold the class to play "<i><b>Noughts and Crosses</b></i>"
about some famous places .


<i><b>Great wall</b></i> <i><b>Ha long Bay</b></i> <i><b>Hue Citadel</b></i>
<i><b>Big Ben</b></i> <i><b>Emprire State Twin Tower</b></i>


<i><b>Everest</b></i> <i><b>Phong Nha</b></i>
<i><b>Cave</b></i>


<i><b>Eiffel</b></i>
<i><b>Tower.</b></i>


15


3


- Work in groups to take part in
the game


about some famous places .
<b>3. New lesson:</b>


Teacher’s activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1. Pre-listening</b>


- Present some new words and phrases:



<i>+Jungle: rõng. </i>


<i>+Crystal-clear water: níc trong nh pha lª.</i>
<i>+Coral Sea<b>:</b> biĨn san hô.</i>


<i>+Snorkel<b>:</b> bơi lặn có sử dụng ống thë</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(192)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=192>

- Ask Ss to read the advertisement on page 133
to get informations.


<b>2. While-listening</b>
- Play the tape (once)


- Underline wrong words in the advertisement.
- Play the tape (twice)


- Ask Ss to give As in front of the class.


- Play the tape again (once) and give the right
answers.


Do you want a quiet, relaxing vacation ?


Look no further than beautiful far north
Queensland. Stay right on the beach at the
Coconut Palm Hotel. Take guided tours
through the rainforest, swim in the crystal
clear water of the Coral Sea and Snorkel
amongst the coral of the Great Barrier Reef


Marine Park - a World Heritage Site.


Call (077) 692439027 for more information.
<b>3. Post-listening</b>


- T expains futher informations about <b>Great</b>
<b>Barrier Reef</b> and <b>Scuba diving & snorkeling</b>.
(P.158, planing book)


13


5


- Read the advertisement,
and prepare to listen to
the tape and find out and
correct the mistakes.
- Listen to the tape


- Underline the words,
following the T.


- Listen to the tape and
correct the mistekes.
- Compare answers with
parners.


- Read ansers aloud.


- Listen to the tape again


and check the answers.


- Listen to the T, and then
discuss about these.


<b>4. Consolidation: (1)</b>


- Retell the main content of the lesson
<b>5. Home work: (1)</b>


- Ask Ss to do the exercise 4 (P.86) (work book )


Week Date of planning


Period 88 Date of teaching


Class 8A


Unit 14: wonders of the world
<b> Reading+language focus 1</b>
<b>A The aims and requests</b>


<b>1. Objectives.</b>


- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be provided the knowledges about seven
Wonders of the World such as <i>Hanging Gardens of Babylon, Statue of Zeus, Taj</i>
<i>Mahal, Angkor Wat</i>...


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(193)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=193>

+ Structure: <i>Review</i>



+ Vocabulary: Ancient Greece, Compile<i><b>, </b>Royal capital city, Hanging Garden</i>
<i>of Babylon, Statue of Zeus, Buddist religious center....</i>


- Ss train reading comprehension and multiple choise skills.
<b>3. Preparation</b>


<b>+Teacher: Text book, work book, tape and cassette player, ...</b>
<b>+Students: Text book, work book, school things, ....</b>


<b>B. Procedures.</b>
<b>1. Organization: (1 )</b>


-Good morning! How are you? Who’s absent today?
<b>2. Checking up/Warm-up: (5-7</b>’)


Teacher’s activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1.Checking up </b>


- Ask Ss to give their mome work in front of the
class.


Answer key:


<i>b) Nam asked Nga if Nga liked traveling. Nga said </i>
<i>she did</i>


<i>c) Nam asked Nga if the Big Ben was in London. </i>
<i>Nga ....</i>



<i>d) Nam asked Nga if It was cold in Sydney in </i>
<i>January. ....</i>


<i>e) Nam asked Nga if Pyramids in Egypt attracted a </i>
<i>lot of tourists ...</i>


<i>f) Nam asked Nga if Ha Long Bay was one of the </i>
<i>world heritages ...</i>


....
<b>2.Warm up</b>


- Hold the class to play "Guessing Game" with 20
questions about a famous place or person in
vietnam.


Clue: <i><b>It is in Vietnam, I think of a famous place.</b></i>
<b>The Temple of Literature</b>


3


4


- Work in groups to take part
in the game


EX:


S1: <i>Is it in Ha Noi</i> ?



S2: <i>Are there lots of stone</i>
<i>turtles </i>?


<b>3. New lesson:</b>


Teacher’s activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1. Pre-reading</b>


- Introduce (Today we are going to learn more
about the world heritages) .


- Present new words and phrases.


8


- Listen to the T.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(194)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=194>

<i>+Ancient Greece: Hy lạp cổ đại.</i>
<i>+Compile: Biên tập </i>


<i>+Royal capital city: kinh thµnh </i>


<i>+Hanging Garden of Babylon:vơn treo Babylon</i>
<i>+Statue of Zeus: tợng thần Dớt.</i>


<i>+Knowing nothing about: chẳng biết gì đến</i>
<i>+Taj Mahal: Cung điện Taj Mahal.</i>


<i>+Angkor Wat: đền Angkor wat.</i>



<i>+Buddist religious center: trung t©m phËt gi¸o.</i>


<b>2. While-reading</b>


- Hold the class to read the text and do matching.


<b>A</b> <b>B</b>


1. Angkor
Thom


a) made the list of the 7
wonders of the world
2. Great Wall


of China


b) used to be the royal
capital city of Cambodia
3. Angkor Wat


c) is one of examples of
the wonders wich the
ancient Greeks knew
nothing about


4. Antipater of


Sidon d) was build in 1100


- Give the right answers:


1 + b 2 + c 3 + d 4 + a


- Conduct Ss to read the text again and choose A,
B, C or D to complete the sentences.


- Ask Ss to give their answers.
- Give the right answers.


a. (C) The only surviving wonder on Antipater’s
list is the Pyramid of Cheops.


b. (A). Angkor Wat was originally built for
<i>Hindus.</i>


c. (D). Angkor Wat was part of a royal Khmer
<i>city a long timre ago.</i>


d. (B) In the 1400s, the Khmer King chose
<i>Phnom Penh as the new capital.</i>


- Ask some Ss to read the text aloud
<b>3. Post-reading</b>


- Ask Ss to retell content of the text on their own
words


20



- Work individually to read
the text and then do matching.
- Give answers in front of the
class.


- Check and copy the right
answers.


- Choose the correct answer,
then check with parners.


- Give answers in front of the
class.


- Read the text aloud in front
of the class


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(195)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=195>

5


<b>4. Consolidation: (1)</b>


- Ss repeat and remember about world heritages in the lesson.


<b>5. Home work:</b> (1)


- Ask Ss to do exercise 5 on page 85 (the work book)


Week Date of planning


Period 89 Date of teaching



Class 8A


Unit 14: wonders of the world
<b> writing</b>


<b>A The aims and requests</b>
<b>1. Objectives. </b>


- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be provided information about the famous
places : Grand Canyon, Cuc Phuong National Park...


<b>2. Teaching point: </b>
+ Structure: <i>Review </i>


+ Vocabulary: Canyon, Park ranger, Giuded hike, Edge, Original inhabitants, ..


- Ss train writing to describe a trip.
<b>3. Preparation</b>


<b>+ Teacher: Text book, work book, extra board ...</b>
<b>+ Students: Text book, work book, school things, ....</b>
<b>B. Procedures.</b>


<b>1. Organization: (1)</b>


-Good morning! How are you? Who’s absent today?
<b>2. Checking up: (5-7</b>’)


Teacher’s activities T Ss’ activities



<b>1.Warm – up</b>


- Hold the class to play "Networks" about World
Heritages.


EX:


<i>+The great Pyramids.</i>
<i>+The leaning Tower.</i>
<i>+The Eiffel Tower.</i>
<i>+The Great Barrier Reef</i>


3 - Take part in the game:


Great Wall of China.


Halong Bay
<b>3. New lesson:</b>


Teacher’s activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1. Pre-writing</b>


- Ask Ss to scan Tim' s letter to his friend
- Present new words and phrases:


9


- Scan Tim' s letter to his


friend


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(196)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=196>

<i>+Canyon: Khe núi.</i>


<i>+Park ranger: Ngời giữ công viên.</i>


<i>+Giuded hike: Cuộc đi bộ có hớng dẫn viên</i>
<i>+Edge: Rìa , mép.</i>


<i>+Original inhabitants: C dân gốc của một nơi</i>
<i>nào đó.</i>


<b>2. While-writing</b>


- Hold the class to write a letter ...
Note: The letter should include.


<i>Place:</i>


<i>+Distances from your village:</i>
<i>+How to get there:</i>


<i>+Sights:</i>
<i>+Weather:</i>
<i>+How you feel:</i>


- Ask Ss to read their writings aloud.


- Give a suggested letter on the extra-board.
April 17th<sub> ,2008.</sub>



Dear...,


How are you ? I was very happy to get your
letter some days ago.


My class has just come back from a trip to
Hung King Temple. A famous of interest in Phu
Tho province. It is about 60 km from Dong Tho
village, and it took us 3 hours to get there by car.
Although it was summer, it was quite cool
because there are many big and old trees there.


We were very surprised that Hung King
temple consisted of 4 big temples. They are
Gieng Temple, Ha Temple, Trung Temple, and
Thuong Temple. Hung King Temple was built
many years ago to honor Hung King and our
ancestors.


After visted the big four temples, we went to
Hung Vuong musuem. The guide showed us the
history of the things there. And we took many
photographs there.


We felt very happy after the trip. I enclose a
photo that I took during the trip. I hope you like
it.


What do you plan to do the summer vacation


? Write to me soon.


Your friend,
Hoa.


<b>3. Post-writing</b>


- Ask Ss to read their letters that they have
written aloud, correct mistakes ...


22


- Read and copy the words.


- Work in pairs, read the letter
again and insert the sentences
in the correct blank.


- Give answers.
Ss' answers may be:


(1) C. <i>I hope you are studying</i>
<i>hard</i> ....


(2) B. <i>The Canyon is part of</i>
<i>Grand</i> ...


(3) D. <i>He also talked about</i>
<i>the</i> ....



(4) A. <i>That' s all I have time</i>
<i>to tell</i> ....


- Work individually, write a
letter to a friend telling
him/her about the last trip to a
famous place.


- Check the letter with
partners.


- Read letters aloud in front of
the class.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(197)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=197>

7


- Read the writings aloud and
correct mistakes together.


<b>4. Consolidation: (2)</b>


- T reminds Ss to remember the main form of a letter , describing a trip.
<b>5. Home work: (1)</b>


- T asks Ss to write a letter to a friend to retell about his/her last trip.


Week Date of planning


Period 90 Date of teaching



Class 8A


revision
<b>A The aims and requests</b>


<b>1. Objectives. </b>


- By the end of the lesson, Ss will review : Past continuous tense, present
progressive tense,reported speech, indirect questions with "if / whether", Question
words ...,


<b>2. Teaching point: </b>
+ Structure: <i>Review</i>


+ Vocabulary: <i>Review</i>


- Reviewing and doing exercises
<b>3. Preparation</b>


<b>+Teacher: Text book, work book,...</b>


<b>+Students: Text book, work book, school things, ....</b>
<b>B. Procedures.</b>


<b>1. Organization: (1)</b>


-Good morning! How are you? Who’s absent today?
<b>2. Checking up: </b>


<b>3. New lesson:</b>



Teacher’s activities T Ss’ activities


<b>1. Past progressive</b>


- Repeat the uses and forms of <b>Past</b>
<b>progressive tense</b>:


+ The form:


[S + was/were + V-ing + O]
+ The use:


10


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(198)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=198>

- Express an action that was
happening at the fix time in the past.
Eg: <i>I was watching TV at 7 p.m last</i>
<i>night.</i>


- Express an action that was happening
, and the other action happened.


Eg: <i>I was watching TV when the phone</i>


<i>rang.</i>


- Express two actions was happening
at the same time in the past.



Eg: <i>I was doing my homework while</i>


<i>my mother was watching TV</i>.


-Ask Ss to do exercise 1


<b>2. Passive form: "Be + PII"</b>:


- Hold the class to do exercise 1 on
page 128 (text book).


- Check Ss' answers then give the
right As:


<i>a) were performed </i>
<i>b) was decorated </i>
<i>c) is made </i>


<i>d) will be held </i>
<i>e) was awarded </i>
<i>f) was written </i>


- Hold the class to do exercise 2 on
page 128 (text book).


<b>3. Reported speech</b>


- Ask Ss to retell the changes when
they rewrite the reperted speech.
Ex: Marry said, I am tired now“ “



 <i>Marry said (that) she was tired at</i>
<i>once.</i>


- Hold the class to do exercise 4 on
page 130 (text book).


10


- Make examples


- Do exercise 1 and 2 on page 119
(Student' s book).


Answer key:


*Exercise 1:


<i>b) Hoa was eating dinner at 8 o’clock.</i>
<i>c) Bao was doing his home work at 8</i>
<i>o’clock.</i>


<i>d) Nga was writing a letter at 8 o’clock.</i>
<i>e) Na was walking with her dog at 8</i>
<i>o clock.</i>’


*Exercise 2:


a - C , b - F , c - E , d - B ,
e - D , f - A.



- Work in groups to do exercise 1 on
page 128 (text book).


- Give answers


- Check and copy the right As.


- Do exercise 2. (process as exercise 1
above).


* Answer key:
<i>1) jumpled.</i>
<i>2) Broken.</i>
<i>3) Broken.</i>
<i>4) Scattered.</i>
<i>5) Pulled.</i>


- Retell how to make a reported speech.
- Do exercise 4 on page 130 (text book).
(process as the exercises above).


* Ss' answers will be:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(199)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=199>

<b>4. Indirect Qs with "if/whether":</b>


- Do process as I above:


- Give some other questions:
<i>a. Do you like English , Nga ?</i>



<i>b. Is your class ready to do the</i>
<i>exercise Nam ?</i>


<i>c. Are you interested in taking part in </i>
<i>sports ?</i>


10


11


<i>d) He said that new pipes were very </i>
<i>expensive.</i>


<i>e) He said that I had to pay him then.</i>
- Retell the forms and then do exercise
2 on page 136 (text book)


* The right As:


<i>b) Nhi asked Nga if it was far from</i>
<i>Hanoi.</i>


<i>c) Nhi asked Nga if My son was in</i>
<i>Quang Nam province.</i>


<i>d) Nhi asked Nga if Many people</i>
<i>lived at My Son.</i>


<i>e) Nhi asked Nga if many tourist</i>


<i>visited My Son every year.</i>


<i>f) Nhi asked Nga if she wanted to</i>
<i>visit My son one day.</i>


- Change the T' Qs in to indirect:


<b>4. Consolidation: (2)</b>


- T reminds Ss to remember forms and uses of Past continuous tense, present
progressive tense,reported speech, indirect questions with "if / whether",
Question words ...,


<b>5. Home work: (1)</b>


<b>- T asks Ss to review Unit 12, 13, 14 to prepare for the 5th<sub> test.</sub></b>


Week Date of planning


Period 91 Date of teaching


Class 8A


Written Test
<b>Time: 45 minutes</b>


<b>A The aims and requests</b>
<b>1. Objectives. </b>


- By the end of the test students will check their knowledges on Unit 12, 13, 14


and know what they need to improve in the future.


<b>2. Teaching point: </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(200)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=200>

speech. List the countries... Choose the best options. Vocabulary from Unit 12 to
Unit 14.


- Ss check their skills on listening, reading and writing
<b>3. Preparation</b>


<b>+Teacher: Teaching plan, matrix, papers of questions ....</b>
<b>+Students: School things,....</b>


<b>B. Procedures.</b>
<b>1. Organization: (1)</b>


-Good morning! How are you? Who’s absent today?
<b>2. Checking up: </b>


<b>3. New lesson:</b>


Matrix:


<b>Unit</b>
<b>(Topic)</b>
<b>Content</b>


<b>s</b>


<b>Requirement</b>



<b>Total</b>


<b>Realize</b> <b><sub>thoroughly</sub>Grasp</b> <b>Apply</b>


<b>Object</b> <b>Subject Object</b> <b>Subjec<sub>t</sub></b> <b>Object Subject</b>


Listening 8 <i><sub>(2)</sub></i> <b>8</b> <i><b><sub>(2)</sub></b></i>


Reading 8 <i><sub>(2)</sub></i> <b>8</b> <i><b><sub>(2)</sub></b></i>


Writing 5 <i><sub>(2,5)</sub></i> <b>5</b> <i><b><sub>(2,5)</sub></b></i>


Gramma
r


6


<i>(1,5)</i>


<b>6</b>


<i><b>(1,5)</b></i>


Voca... 8 <i><sub>(2)</sub></i> <b>8</b> <i><b><sub>(2)</sub></b></i>


<b>Total</b> <b>16</b> <i><b><sub>(4)</sub></b></i> <b>14</b> <i><b><sub>(3,5)</sub></b></i> <b>5</b> <i><b><sub>(2,5)</sub></b></i> <b>35</b> <i><b><sub>(10)</sub></b></i>


<b>Questions </b>



<i><b>I- Listen to the weather reports. Then fill in the blanks on the table. </b></i>(2 points)


<b>Places</b> <b>Weather</b> <b>Temperature</b>


<b>Low</b> <b>High</b>


Ha Noi <i>(1)...</i> 230<sub>C</sub> <i><sub>(2) ...</sub></i>
Sa Pa Windy, cloudy <i>(3)...</i> <i>(4) ...</i>


Hue <i>(5) ... (6) ...</i> 180<sub>C</sub>
HCM City <i>(7) ...</i> 200<sub>C</sub> <i><sub>(8) ...</sub></i>
<b>II- Read. Then make True or False. Check () the boxes.</b><i><b> (2 points)</b></i>


</div>

<!--links-->

Tài liệu bạn tìm kiếm đã sẵn sàng tải về

Tải bản đầy đủ ngay
×